JP2022089995A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of appropriately executing a performance.

SOLUTION: In a slot machine 10, a sound performance by a speaker device 64 is executed by a sound generated by sound generation processing by each sound source IC. In this case, a first sound source IC generates a first sound of a length of a first period, a second sound source IC generates a second sound of a length of the first period of the same length as the first sound on a first sound source IC side, and then generates a third sound of a length of a second period. The second sound is set to a sound in which a player cannot identify an output sound. The first to third sounds are generated by the first sound source IC and the second sound source IC so that a series of sound performances are executed in which the third sound is identified subsequent to the first sound.

SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

COPYRIGHT: (C)2022,JPO&INPIT

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as a type of gaming machine. It is known that these gaming machines perform an internal lottery based on the fact that a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied, and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, when the start lever is operated while a medal as a game medium is bet on the slot machine, an internal lottery is performed, the reel starts rotating, and the reel stops during rotation. When the switch is operated, the rotation of the reel is stopped. Then, when the reel stop result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

In this type of gaming machine, a sound effect may be performed by a sound generation means such as a speaker as a kind of effect corresponding to the result of the internal lottery.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2008-295707

Here, in the above-exemplified gaming machines, there is a demand for optimization of the effect, and for example, there is still room for improvement in the sound effect.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately performing an effect.

The invention according to claim 1 is
A gaming machine provided with a sound reproducing means capable of reproducing a predetermined sound based on predetermined sound information generated by the sound information generating means.
The sound information generation means is
The first sound information generation means for generating the first sound information,
A second sound information generating means for generating a second sound information having the same reproduction period as the first sound information and a third sound information following the second sound information.
Equipped with
Depending on the reproduction by the sound reproduction means based on the second sound information, it is difficult or impossible for the player to grasp the sound.
It is characterized in that a series of sounds can be reproduced by reproducing a sound based on the first sound information and reproducing a sound based on the third sound information by the sound reproducing means.

According to the present invention, it is possible to preferably perform an effect.

It is a front view of the slot machine in one Embodiment. It is a perspective view of the slot machine which shows the state which the front door is closed. It is a perspective view of the slot machine which shows the state which the front door is opened. It is a rear view of the front door. It is a front view of a housing. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement of each reel. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the design which becomes visible from a display window, and an effective line. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the design which becomes visible from a display window, and an effective line. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege given. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege given. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege given. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a main control device. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing by a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process by a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery process. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for a normal game state. It is a flowchart which shows the reel control processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the operation order of a stop button, and the winning mode which is established. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating stop control of a reel. It is a flowchart which shows the RT state processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for the 1st RT state. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the operation order of a stop button, and the winning mode which is established. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for the 2nd RT state. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for the 3rd RT state. It is a flowchart which shows the bonus state processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the operation order of a stop button, and the winning mode which is established. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for a BB state. It is explanatory drawing which shows the transition relation of each state. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline of the display mode. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery result correspondence processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st specific combination processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd specific combination processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 3rd specific combination processing. It is a flowchart which shows the mode transition notification processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline of push order notification. It is a flowchart which shows the push order combination processing. It is a flowchart which shows the winning result correspondence processing. It is a flowchart which shows the game number management process. It is a flowchart which shows the end determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the process for a special zone. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process by a sub-control device. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process at the time of betting. It is a flowchart which shows the staging setting process at the start. It is a flowchart which shows the process for pushing order notification. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the addition effect. It is a figure which shows an example of a notification timing table. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process at the time of each stop operation. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the notification timing and the addition effect. It is a flowchart which shows the staging setting process at the time of all stop. It is a flowchart which shows the process for bonus notification. It is a flowchart which shows the process for notifying a specific role. It is a flowchart which shows the continuous effect setting process. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by a liquid crystal display device. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by a liquid crystal display device. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by a liquid crystal display device. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by a liquid crystal display device. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by a liquid crystal display device. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating an example of a continuous production. It is a flowchart which shows the effect data setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the display data setting process. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the correspondence relationship between the effect content and effect command, and display data. It is a flowchart which shows the V interrupt processing by a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the sound data setting process. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the correspondence relationship between the production content and sound data. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship between sound data and sound source data. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the set example of output data. It is a flowchart which shows the sound generation processing by a sound source IC. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the silence data from the relation with volume data. This is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between the frame update timing of the display effect and the sound data. In the second embodiment, it is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the correspondence relationship between the effect content and sound data. This is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between the frame update timing of the display effect and the sound data. In the third embodiment, it is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the difference between the game number management type production and the time management type production. It is a flowchart which shows the sound data setting process. In the fourth embodiment, it is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the generation point of a specific sound in a special production. It is a flowchart which shows the process for special effect by a main control device. It is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between the special effect and the sound data.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, an embodiment when applied to a rotating cylinder type gaming machine, which is a kind of gaming machine, specifically, a slot machine, will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. 1 is a front view of the slot machine 10, FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 closed, FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 open, and FIG. 4 is a front view. A rear view of the door 12 and FIG. 5 are front views of the housing 11.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 5, the slot machine 10 includes a housing 11 that forms an outer shell thereof. The housing 11 is formed in a box shape with an open front surface as a whole, and is attached by driving a nail to a so-called island facility at the time of installation in a game hall.

A front door 12 is attached to the front side of the housing 11 so as to be openable and closable. That is, the housing 11 is provided with a pair of upper and lower support shafts 13a and 13b on the left side portion when viewed from the front thereof, and the front door 12 is provided with bearing portions 14a at positions corresponding to the respective support shafts 13a and 13b. , 14b are provided. When the support shafts 13a and 13b are inserted into the bearing portions 14a and 14b, the front door 12 rotates around the opening / closing axis extending in the vertical direction connecting the support shafts 13a and 13b to the housing 11. It is movably supported, and the front open side of the housing 11 can be opened and closed by the rotation of the front door 12. Further, the front door 12 is in a locked state that cannot be opened by the locking device 20 provided on the back surface thereof. A key cylinder 21 integrated with the locking device 20 is provided on the upper right end side of the front door 12, and is configured to release the locked state by a predetermined key operation on the key cylinder 21.

A game panel 25 for notifying the player of the game state is provided near the center of the front door 12. Three vertically long display windows 26L, 26M, 26R are formed side by side on the game panel 25, and the inside of the slot machine 10 can be visually recognized through the respective display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. The display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R may be combined into one to form a common display window.

As shown in FIG. 3, the inside of the housing 11 is divided into upper and lower parts by a partition plate 30, and a reel unit 31 constituting a variable display means is attached to the upper part of the partition plate 30. The reel unit 31 includes a left reel 32L, a middle reel 32M, and a right reel 32R, which are formed in a cylindrical shape (annular shape), respectively. Each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is rotatably supported so that its central axis is the rotation axis of the reel. The rotation axes of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are arranged on the same axis extending in a substantially horizontal direction, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R correspond one-to-one with the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. .. Therefore, a part of the surface of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is visible through the corresponding display windows 26L, 26M, 26R, respectively. Further, when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R rotate in the forward direction, the surfaces of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are projected as if they are moving from top to bottom through the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R.

Here, the configuration of the reel unit 31 will be briefly described.

Each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is connected to a stepping motor, and each reel 32L, 32M, 32R can be rotationally driven individually, that is, independently by driving each stepping motor. .. The stepping motor is set to rotate once by, for example, giving a drive signal of 504 pulses (hereinafter, also referred to as an excitation pulse), and the rotation position of the stepping motor, that is, the rotation position of the reel is set by this excitation pulse. Be controlled. Further, in the reel unit 31, reel index sensors for detecting that the reel has rotated once are installed in each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. Then, when the reel index sensor detects that the reel has rotated once, a detection signal is output to the main control device 101, which will be described later, each time the detection is performed. Therefore, the main control device 101 sets the angular position of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R for each rotation based on the detection signal of the reel index sensor and the number of excitation pulses output until the detection signal is input. It can be confirmed and corrected.

On the outer peripheral surface of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, a plurality of symbols as identification information are drawn in the long side direction (circumferential direction) thereof. More specifically, 21 symbols are drawn at equal intervals. Therefore, in order to switch a symbol at a predetermined position to the next symbol, it is necessary to output 24 pulses (= 504 pulses ÷ 21 symbols) of excitation pulses. Further, the main control device 101 grasps a symbol that is visible from the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R by the number of excitation pulses output after the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input, and the display window. It is possible to perform control such as stopping a predetermined symbol at a position visible from 26L, 26M, 26R.

Next, the symbols drawn on the reels 32L, 32M, 32R will be described.

FIG. 6 shows a symbol arrangement of the left reel 32L, the middle reel 32M, and the right reel 32R. As shown in the figure, 21 symbols are arranged in a row on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. Further, numbers 0 to 20 are assigned to each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and these numbers are designed so that the main control device 101 can be visually recognized from the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. It is a number for recognizing, and is not actually attached to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, in the following description, the number will be used.

The symbols include a "red bell" symbol (for example, the 20th of the left reel 32L), a "first replay" symbol (for example, the 19th of the left reel 32L), and a "red 7" symbol (for example, 18 of the left reel 32L). Second), "watermelon" symbol (eg, 17th on left reel 32L), "white bell" symbol (eg, 12th on left reel 32L), "second replay" symbol (eg, 11th on left reel 32L) , "White 7" symbol (eg, 10th on left reel 32L), "Cherry" symbol (eg, 9th on left reel 32L), "BAR" symbol (eg, 5th on left reel 32L), "Youth" There are 10 types of symbols (for example, the 0th of the left reel 32L). And, as shown in FIG. 6, the number and arrangement order of various symbols are completely different in each reel 32L, 32M, 32R.

Each display window 26L, 26M, 26R is formed so that out of the 21 symbols attached to the corresponding reels, 3 symbols can be visually recognized as the entire symbol. Therefore, when all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, 3 × 3 = 9 symbols can be visually recognized through the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R.

In the slot machine 10, the game result of each game is notified by using a combination of a total of three symbols, one symbol for each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R among the symbols that can be visually recognized. Since 3 × 3 = 9 symbols can be visually recognized as described above, as a combination of these three symbols, for example, as shown in FIG. 7, the upper symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are connected. The combination of each symbol that stops on the upper line L1, the combination of each symbol that stops on the middle line L2 that connects the middle symbols of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and the lower symbol of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R are connected. There is a combination of each symbol that stops at the lower line L3. In addition, the combination of each symbol that stops at the lower right line L4 connecting the upper symbol of the left reel 32L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the lower symbol of the right reel 32R, the lower symbol of the left reel 32L, and the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M. There is a combination of symbols and symbols that stop at the upward-sloping line L5 connecting the upper symbols of the right reel 32R. In addition, there is also a combination of each symbol that stops at the bending line L6 connecting the upper symbol of the left reel 32L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the middle symbol of the right reel 32R. The above lines L1 to L5 are lines that become a straight line when the symbols are arranged, and the bending line L6 is a line where bending occurs in the middle when the symbols are arranged. It should be noted that there are combinations of symbols that stop at the line where the bending occurs, other than the bending line L6, but the description thereof will be omitted here.

Of these lines L1 to L6, a line that is activated and a line that is not activated depending on the number of medals bets are set, and when the symbols are stopped in a predetermined combination on the activated line, that is, the valid line. As a winning result, a privilege that a predetermined number of medals, which are game media, are paid out is given, and a privilege that the game state is changed is given. On the other hand, if the symbols stop in a predetermined combination on the line that is not activated, the prize is not established and the above privilege is not given.

In the slot machine 10, only the right-down line L4 is regarded as an effective line as shown in FIG. 8 (a), and the lower line L3 and the right-down line L4 are shown in FIG. 8 (b). There are cases where the combination line is an effective line and cases where only the bent line L6 is an effective line as shown in FIG. 8 (c). More specifically, if three medals are bet and the game is started, only the downward-sloping line L4 is considered to be the valid line, and if two medals are bet and the game is started, the lower line is below. The line L3 and the downward-sloping line L4 are considered to be effective lines. Further, when one medal is bet and the game is started, only the bent line L6 is regarded as an effective line. The three combination lines of the upper line L1, the middle line L2, and the upward-sloping line L5 are not regarded as effective lines. In the following, a game started with 3 medals bet is a 3-bet game, a game started with 2 medals bet is a 2-bet game, and a game started with 1 medal bet is started. Also known as a one-bet game.

9 to 11 are diagrams showing a correspondence relationship between a combination of symbols to be won and a privilege given when the prize is won.

The small winning combination for which medals are paid out includes the 1st small winning combination to the 32nd small winning combination.

If the "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line, It will be the first small role prize. If the first small winning combination is successful, 9 medals will be paid out in the 3-bet game and 15 medals will be paid out in the 2-bet game.

The 2nd small winning combination to the 17th small winning combination have different combinations of winning symbols, but in the 3-bet game, the left reel 32L "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol and the middle reel 32M The "red bell" symbol and the "red bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the upper line L1, that is, the "bell" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R stops on the upper line L1. Is. For example, the "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L stops at the top, the "cherry" symbol on the middle reel 32M stops at the middle, and the "second replay" symbol on the right reel 32R stops at the bottom. If it is stopped, it will be the 5th small winning combination. As shown in FIG. 6, on the middle reel 32M, the "cherry" symbol (11th and 14th) and the "red bell" symbol are arranged at adjacent positions (12th and 15th) on the upstream side. On the right reel 32R, the "red bell" symbol is arranged at a position (No. 2 and 5) separated by one symbol from the "second replay" symbol (No. 0 and No. 3) on the upstream side. Therefore, when the fifth small winning combination is established on the right-down line L4, the "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the right. The "red bell" symbol on the reel 32R will stop on the upper line L1. When the 2nd small winning combination to the 17th small winning combination are established, 3 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game and 14 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

The 18th small winning combination winning mode is a winning mode in which the "cherry" symbol on the left reel 32L stops at the upper or lower row. If the 18th small winning combination is successful, 3 medals will be paid out in the 3-bet game and 15 medals will be paid out in the 2-bet game.

The "Red 7" symbol, "BAR" symbol, "Watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Red bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stopped on the effective line. In that case, the 19th small winning combination will be won. If the 19th small winning combination is successful, 9 medals will be paid out in the 3-bet game and 15 medals will be paid out in the 2-bet game.

If the 20th small winning combination to the 24th small winning combination is established in the 3-bet game, 3 medals are paid out, and in the 2-bet game, 14 medals are paid out.

Similar to the 18th small winning combination, the 25th small winning combination is a winning mode in which the "cherry" symbol on the left reel 32L stops at the upper or lower row. In the case of the 18th small winning combination, the "red 7" symbol or the "white 7" symbol on the right reel 32R may stop in the middle stage only when the winning combination is duplicated with the BB ("second replay" symbol, If the "BAR" symbol and "BAR" symbol combination) is the 25th small winning combination, the "Red 7" symbol or "White 7" symbol on the right reel 32R will stop in the middle row regardless of whether or not the BB has been won. Can be. If the 25th small winning combination is successful, 3 medals will be paid out in the 3-bet game and 15 medals will be paid out in the 2-bet game.

If the "watermelon" symbol or "BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line, the 26th minor role It will be a prize. If the 26th small winning combination is successful, 5 medals will be paid out in the 3-bet game and 5 medals will be paid out in the 2-bet game.

The 27th small winning combination is, for example, when the player operates the stop switches 42 to 44 aiming at the "watermelon" symbol of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M, or the left reel 32L. The "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stops on the effective line, while the "watermelon" symbol on the remaining reels does not stop on the effective line. If the 27th small winning combination is successful, 3 medals will be paid out in the 3-bet game and 15 medals will be paid out in the 2-bet game.

Left reel 32L "red bell" or "white bell" symbol, middle reel 32M "red 7" symbol, "BAR" symbol, "white bell" symbol, "cherry" symbol, "youth" symbol, and right If the "red bell" symbol on the reel 32R stops on the effective line, the 28th small winning combination will be won. As shown in FIG. 6, on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol (3rd, 7th, 15th, 20th) and the adjacent position on the downstream side (2nd, 6th, 14th, 19th) ), The "first replay" symbol is arranged, and the "second replay" symbol is arranged at the adjacent position (11th) on the downstream side of the "white bell" symbol (No. 12). On the right reel 32R, the "red bell" symbol (2nd, 5th, 10th, 15th, 20th) and the adjacent position on the upstream side (3rd, 6th, 16th, 0th) are "No. A "1 replay" symbol or a "second replay" symbol is arranged. Therefore, when the 28th small winning combination is established on the right-down line L4, the "bell" on the left reel 32L and the right reel 32R, except when the "white bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M stops in the middle stage. While the symbol and the "replay" symbol are tempered, the "bell" symbol and the "replay" symbol of the middle reel 32M do not stop, which is a so-called double tempai stop roll. If the 28th small winning combination is successful, 9 medals will be paid out in the 3-bet game and 15 medals will be paid out in the 2-bet game.

If the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line, the 29th small winning combination will be won. In a 3-bet game, if the player operates the left stop switch at the timing when the 9th "cherry" symbol on the left reel 32L reaches the upper or middle stage, and if the 29th small winning combination is established, the left The "white bell" symbol on the reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red bell" symbol on the right reel 32R will stop on the middle line L2. If the 29th small winning combination is successful, 3 medals will be paid out in the 3-bet game and 15 medals will be paid out in the 2-bet game.

If the "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red 7" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line, It will be the 30th small role prize. Although the details will be described later, the 30th small winning combination winning mode is a winning mode that is established only in the 3-bet game. If the 30th small winning combination is successful, 9 medals will be paid out.

If the "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line, the first 31 small wins. Although the details will be described later, the 31st small winning combination winning mode is a winning mode that is established only in the 3-bet game. If the 31st small winning combination is successful, 9 medals will be paid out.

If the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white 7" symbol or "cherry" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line, the 32nd small It will be a winning prize. If the 32nd small winning combination is successful, 3 medals will be paid out in the 3-bet game and 15 medals will be paid out in the 2-bet game.

There are 1st re-game prize to 8th re-game prize as prizes to which the privilege of the re-game that can play the next game without inserting a medal is given. Further, when the second re-game prize is established, the game state shifts to the first RT state, and when the third re-game prize is established, the game state shifts to the second RT state, and the fourth re-game If a prize or a fifth re-game prize is established, the game state shifts to the third RT state. The first re-game prize to the eighth re-game prize are prize modes that are established only in the 3-bet game.

The state transition prizes in which only the game state transition is performed include the first BB prize, the second BB prize, and the CB prize.

When the "Red 7" symbol of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R stops on the effective line, the first BB prize is won, and when the "White 7" symbol of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R stops on the effective line. When the "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "second replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "white 7" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line, the second BB prize is awarded. .. When these BB prizes are established, the gaming state shifts to the BB state. If the "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line, , CB prize. If the CB prize is established, the gaming state shifts to the CB state.

In addition, although it is different from the winning, there is a stop roll in which the gaming state shifts to the first RT state. Specifically, the "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red 7" symbol, "BAR" symbol, "white bell" symbol, "cherry" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the right. When the "watermelon" symbol of the reel 32R and the "watermelon" symbol stop on the effective line, the gaming state shifts to the first RT state. In addition, the "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white 7" symbol, "watermelon" symbol, "first replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red 7" on the right reel 32R. Even when the symbol, the "white 7" symbol, the "second replay" symbol, and the "cherry" symbol stop on the effective line, the gaming state shifts to the first RT state. In the following, the combination of each of the above symbols will be referred to as a transitional outcome.

On the lower left side of the game panel 25, a start lever 41 operated to start the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is provided. The start lever 41 constitutes a start operation means or a start operation means operated to start the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, that is, to start the variable display of the symbol. When the start lever 41 is operated with a predetermined number of medals inserted, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start to rotate.

On the right side of the start lever 41, button-shaped stop switches 42 to 44 that are operated to individually stop the rotating reels 32L, 32M, 32R are provided. The stop switches 42 to 44 are arranged directly below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped.

The stop detection sensors 42a to 44a (FIG. 12) are connected to the stop switches 42 to 44, respectively, and the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a and the main control device 101 described later are connected to each other. Then, the main control device 101 grasps that the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been performed based on the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a. Specifically, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are not operated, the LOW signal detection signal is output from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated by operating the stop switches 42 to 44. The detection signal is switched from the LOW signal to the HI signal. The main control device 101 grasps the switching of such signals and grasps that the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated. When the main control device 101 grasps that the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated, the main control device 101 controls to stop the rotation of the reel corresponding to the operated switch.

That is, when the left stop switch 42 is operated, the rotation of the left reel 32L is stopped, and when the middle stop switch 43 is operated, the rotation of the middle reel 32M is stopped and the right stop switch 44 is operated. In that case, the rotation of the right reel 32R is stopped. The stop switches 42 to 44 constitute a stop operation means operated to stop the variable display of the symbol based on the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R.

A medal insertion slot 45 for inserting medals is provided on the lower right side of the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R. The medal slot 45 constitutes an input means for inputting a game medium. Further, paying attention to the fact that the medal insertion slot 45 involves the operation of directly inserting medals by the player, it can be said that it constitutes a direct input means for directly inputting the game medium.

The medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 45 are guided to either the storage passage 47 or the discharge passage 48 by the selector 46 as a passage switching means provided on the back surface of the front door 12. More specifically, the selector 46 is provided with a medal passage switching solenoid 46a, and the medal is guided to the discharge passage 48 side when the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is not excited, and the medal is guided to the discharge passage 48 side when the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is excited. Is guided to the storage passage 47 side. The medal guided to the storage passage 47 is guided to the hopper device 51 housed inside the housing 11. On the other hand, the medal guided to the discharge passage 48 is guided to the medal tray 50 from the medal discharge port 49 provided in the lower front portion of the front door 12, and is returned to the player.

The hopper device 51 includes a storage tank 52 for storing medals and a payout device 53 for paying out medals to the player. The payout device 53 discharges the medal to the opening 48a provided in the discharge passage 48 by rotating a rotating plate for paying out medals (not shown), and pays out the medal to the medal tray 50 through the discharge passage 48. It has become. Further, on the right side of the hopper device 51, a spare tank 54 is provided to prevent a predetermined amount or more of medals from being stored in the storage tank 52. Inside the storage tank 52 of the hopper device 51, a guide plate 52a for discharging medals from the storage tank 52 to the spare tank 54 is provided. Therefore, when medals are stored above the height at which the guide plate 52a is provided, the medals are stored in the spare tank 54.

A button-shaped return switch 55 is provided below the medal slot 45. When the return switch 55 is operated while the medals inserted in the medal slot 45 are jammed in the selector 46, the selector 46 is mechanically interlocked and the medals packed in the selector 46 are medals. It is designed to be returned from the discharge port 49.

On the lower left side of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R, a first credit insertion switch 56 for inserting three credited virtual medals as a game medium at one time is provided. Further, a second credit insertion switch 57 is provided on the right side of the first credit insertion switch 56, and a third credit insertion switch 58 is provided on the left side of the first credit insertion switch 56. The second credit insertion switch 57 is for inserting one virtual medal, and the third credit insertion switch 58 is for inserting two virtual medals at a time. Each of the credit insertion switches 56 to 58 constitutes an input means for inputting a game medium together with the medal insertion slot 45. Also, note that while the medal insertion slot 45 involves the operation of directly inserting medals by the player, the credit insertion switches 56 to 58 merely involve the operation of inserting virtual medals based on the stored memory. For example, it can be said that it constitutes an indirect input means for indirectly inputting a game medium.

An effect switch 66 operated when an effect is generated is provided between the first credit input switch 56 and the second credit input switch 57. That is, the first credit input switch 56 and the third credit input switch 58 are provided on the left side of the effect switch 66, and the second credit input switch 57 is provided on the right side of the effect switch 66. There is.

A checkout switch 59 is provided on the left side of the start lever 41. That is, the slot machine 10 has a credit function of storing and storing surplus inserted medals and payout medals at the time of winning as virtual medals until the predetermined maximum value (50 medals) is reached. When the settlement switch 59 is operated under the condition of being stored and stored, the virtual medal is paid out from the medal ejection port 49 as a real medal. In this case, paying attention to the function of paying out the credited virtual medal as an actual medal, it can be said that the settlement switch 59 constitutes a settlement operation means for actually paying out the stored and stored game medium.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R of the game panel 25, there is a credit display unit 60 that displays the number of virtual medals that are credited, and the number of remaining medals that display the number of medals remaining to be paid out by the end of the BB state. A display unit 61 and a payout number display unit 62 for displaying the number of medals paid out at the time of winning are provided. These display units 60 to 62 are composed of a 7-segment display, but it is naturally possible to replace them with a liquid crystal display or the like.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R in the game panel 25, on the right side of the payout number display unit 62, a push order notification unit 68 for notifying the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is provided. .. The push order notification unit 68 is composed of three LED lamps corresponding to the left stop switch 42, the middle stop switch 43, and the right stop switch 44, respectively. The push order notification unit 68 can also be replaced by a liquid crystal display or the like, an LED lamp may be provided inside the stop switches 42 to 44 so as to make the stop switches 42 to 44 emit light, or the stop switch 42 may be provided. The LED lamps may be provided adjacent to the to 44.

At the upper part of the front door 12, there is an upper lamp 63 that lights up and blinks as the game progresses, and a pair of left and right lamps that sound various sound effects as the game progresses and notify the player of the game state. The speaker device 64 and a liquid crystal display device 65 as an auxiliary display unit for giving various information to the player are provided. The liquid crystal display device 65 is for executing various display effects as the game progresses, and the game by each reel 32L, 32M, 32R can be considered to be due to the main display unit. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the liquid crystal display device 65 is used. It is called a liquid crystal display device 65. On the back surface of the liquid crystal display device 65, an upper lamp 63, a speaker device 64, a sub control device 81 for driving the liquid crystal display device 65, and a display control device 201 (not shown, see FIG. 12) are provided.

A power supply box 70 is provided on the left side of the hopper device 51 inside the housing 11. The power supply box 70 houses the power supply device 91 inside, and also includes a power supply switch 71, a reset switch 72, a setting key insertion hole 73, and the like. The power switch 71 is a start switch for supplying power to each part including the main control device 101. The reset switch 72 is a switch for resetting the error state of the slot machine 10. Further, the setting key insertion hole 73 is for the hole manager or the like to adjust the medal output. That is, the hall manager or the like can set the winning probability of the slot machine 10 by inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion hole 73 and operating the ON operation. The reset switch 72 is operated not only when resetting the error state but also when changing the winning probability of the slot machine 10.

Above the reel unit 31, a main control device 101 that comprehensively manages the game is attached to the housing 11.

Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 will be described with reference to the block diagrams of FIGS. 12 and 13.

The main control device 101 is equipped with a microcomputer centered on the CPU 102, which is an arithmetic processing means. In addition to the power supply device 91, a clock circuit 103 that outputs a rectangular wave having a predetermined frequency, an input / output port 104, and the like are connected to the CPU 102 via an internal bus. The main control device 101 functions as a main board built in the slot machine 10.

On the input side of the main controller 101, there is a reel unit 31 (more specifically, a reel index sensor that individually detects that each reel 32L, 32M, 32R has rotated once), and a start detection sensor that detects the operation of the start lever 41. 41a, stop detection sensors 42a to 44a for individually detecting the operation of each stop switch 42 to 44, insertion medal detection sensor 45a for detecting medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 45, and medals to be paid out from the hopper device 51. The first credit insertion detection sensor 56a that individually detects the operation of the payout detection sensor 51a and the first credit insertion switch 56, the second credit insertion detection sensor 57a that individually detects the operation of the second credit insertion switch 57, and the third credit. In the third credit input detection sensor 58a that individually detects the operation of the input switch 58, the settlement detection sensor 59a that detects the operation of the settlement switch 59, the reset detection sensor 72a that detects the operation of the reset switch 72, and the setting key insertion hole 73. Various sensors such as the setting key detection sensor 73a that detects that the setting key is inserted and turned ON are connected, and the signals from these various sensors are output to the CPU 102 via the input / output port 104. It has become.

Further, a power supply device 91 is connected to the input side of the main control device 101 via the input / output port 104. The power supply device 91 is equipped with a power supply unit 91a that supplies drive power to each electronic device of the slot machine 10, including the main control device 101, a power failure monitoring circuit 91b, and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the power cutoff state and generates a power failure signal not only when the power is cut off but also when the power supply is cut off by the power switch 71. Therefore, the power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the stabilized drive voltage of DC 12 volt in this example output from the power supply unit 91a, and determines that the power supply is cut off when this drive voltage drops to less than, for example, 10 volt. It is configured to output a power failure signal. The power failure signal is supplied to each of the CPU 102 and the input / output port 104, and the CPU 102 recognizes the power failure signal to execute the power failure process described later. Further, the power failure signal is also configured to be supplied to the sub control device 81.

The power supply unit 91a is configured to output a regulated voltage of 5 volts, which is used as a drive voltage in a control system such as the main control device 101, even when the output voltage drops to less than 10 volts. As the time for outputting this regulated voltage, a sufficient time is secured for executing the power failure processing by the main control device 101.

On the output side of the main control device 101, a reel unit 31 (more specifically, a stepping motor for rotating each reel 32L, 32M, 32R), a medal passage switching solenoid 46a provided in the selector 46, a hopper device 51, and a credit The input / output port 104 includes an external centralized terminal board 121 that can transmit information to a display unit 60, a remaining payout number display unit 61, a payout number display unit 62, a push order notification unit 68, a sub control device 81, a hall management device (not shown), and the like. It is connected via.

The CPU 102 described above has a ROM 105 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 102, and a work area that temporarily stores various data when executing the control program stored in the ROM 105. In addition to the RAM 106 for securing the data, various processing circuits required in the slot machine 10 such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit, as well as a credit counter for counting the number of credits, etc. Various counters are built-in. A main memory as a storage means is configured by the ROM 105 and the RAM 106, and a program for executing various processes is stored in the ROM 105 described above as a part of the control program.

The RAM 106 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 91 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the slot machine 10 is cut off. The RAM 106 has a memory for temporarily storing various data, a winning flag storage area 106a for storing the lottery result of the winning combination, and stop information used when stopping control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. In addition to the stop information storage area 106b for storing the data, the state information storage area 106c for storing the game state such as the BB state, and the like, a backup area is provided.

The backup area is an area for storing the value of the stack pointer when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like (including the power cutoff by operating the power switch 71. The same applies hereinafter). When the power failure is resolved (including turning on the power by operating the power switch 71, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the slot machine 10 can be restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information in the backup area. .. Writing to the backup area is executed when the power is cut off by the power failure process (see FIG. 14), and restoration of each value written in the backup area is executed in the main process when the power is turned on.

Further, the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 102 is configured to input a power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 91b when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When the power is cut off, the NMI interrupt process as the power failure flag generation process is immediately executed.

As shown in FIG. 13, the sub control device 81 is equipped with a microcomputer centered on a CPU 82 which is an arithmetic processing means. The CPU 82 has a ROM 83 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 82, and a work area that temporarily stores various data when executing the control program stored in the ROM 83. A RAM 84 or the like for securing is built-in.

The sub control device 81 is provided with an input / output port (not shown), a main control device 101 is connected to the input side, and an upper lamp 63, a speaker device 64, and a display control device 201 are connected to the output side. ing. Then, the upper lamp 63, the speaker device 64, and the display control device 201 are driven and controlled based on various commands input from the main control device 101. That is, the sub-control device 81 is a sub-board that executes auxiliary control in relation to the main control device 101, which is the main board that centrally manages the game. That is, the burden on the main board is reduced by providing a sub board for voices, lamps, and displays related to indirect games.

The speaker device 64 has a plurality of individual speakers 87a to 87w (first speaker 87a to 23rd speaker 87w). The individual speakers 87a to 87w are installed so that at least one of the installation position and the sound output direction is different. Here, an outline of a configuration in which sound (voice) is output from these plurality of individual speakers 87a to 87w will be described.

The sub control device 81 is provided with a sound source IC for controlling the output of sound, and in the present embodiment, the first sound source IC 85a to the 23rd sound source IC 85w are provided as sound source ICs. The first amplifier 86a to the 23rd amplifier 86w and the first speaker 87a to the 23rd speaker 87w are connected corresponding to each sound source IC 85a to 85w, and in this embodiment, 23 channels are provided as sound output channels. There is. When executing a sound effect by sound, the CPU 82 outputs sound data as sound information to be reproduced to each sound source IC 85a to 85w. The sound source ICs 85a to 85w read the sound source data corresponding to the sound data from the sound source data storage area 83e of the ROM 83, and reproduce the sound source data to produce sound from the individual speakers 87a to 87w via the corresponding amplifiers 86a to 86w. Is output. The processing related to the output of sound data to the sound source ICs 85a to 85w, the reading of the sound data by the sound source ICs 85a to 85w, and the output of the sound by the individual speakers 87a to 87w will be described in detail later. In the following description, the sound source ICs 85a to 85w are collectively referred to as a sound source IC85, the amplifiers 86a to 86w are collectively referred to as an amplifier 86, and the individual speakers 87a to 87w are collectively referred to as an individual speaker 87. A speaker device 64 including the sound source IC 85, the amplifier 86, and the individual speaker 87 constitutes a sound generation means (sound reproduction means).

An effect switch 66 (more specifically, an effect switch detection sensor that detects the operation of the effect switch 66) is connected to the input side of the sub control device 81. Further, on the input side of the sub control device 81, a first Vol switch 75 and a second Vol switch 76 are connected as switches for adjusting the volume of the sound from the individual speakers 87a to 87w. The first Vol switch 75 is a volume switch for a game hall manager or the like, and is provided at a position such as the back of the sub control device 81 where the front door 12 cannot be operated without opening (FIG. FIG. Illustration by 3rd grade is omitted). On the other hand, the second Vol switch 76 is a volume switch for the player, and is provided at a position such as an adjacent position of the effect switch 66, which can be operated without opening the front door 12 (FIG. 1). (The illustration by etc. is omitted). The staging switch 66 may also be used for the second Vol switch 76. That is, the first Vol switch 75 is a volume switch that cannot be operated by the player and can be operated by the manager of the game hall, and the second Vol switch 76 can be operated by the player and is also operated by the manager of the game hall. It is a possible volume switch.

The volume of the first Vol switch 75 can be set in a plurality of steps, and for example, the volume can be set in 10 steps from the set volume 0 to the set volume 9. As the value of the set volume increases, the volume increases, the set volume 9 becomes the maximum volume, and when the set volume is 0, which is the minimum volume, the corresponding sound is not output even if a sound effect is generated.

The volume of the second Vol switch 76 can also be set in a plurality of steps, and for example, the volume can be set in 10 steps from the set volume 1 to the setting 10. Similar to the first Vol switch 75, the volume increases as the value of the set volume increases, and the set volume 10 becomes the maximum volume. On the other hand, unlike the first Vol switch 75, even in the case of the set volume 1 which is the minimum volume, when the sound effect is generated, the corresponding sound is output in a small amount.

For example, when the set volume of the first Vol switch 75 is 0, no sound is output regardless of the set volume of the second Vol switch 76. When the set volume of the first Vol switch 75 is any value from 1 to 9, the output volume is determined by the value and the set volume of the second Vol switch 76. In this case, a range is set for each of the set volumes 1 to 9 of the first Vol switch 75, and by adjusting the set volume of the second Vol switch 76, the range corresponding to the set volume on the first Vol switch 75 side is set. The volume is set within the range of. The ranges set for the set volumes 1 to 9 of the first Vol switch 75 may be set so that overlapping areas occur between different set volumes, or do not occur so that overlapping areas do not occur. It may have been.

The volume from each of the individual speakers 87a to 87w may be individually set for either or both of the first Vol switch 75 and the second Vol switch 76.

The display control device 201 is provided with a CPU 202, which is an element in which a program ROM 203 and a work RAM 204 are combined into chips, a video display processor (VDP) 205, a character ROM 206, and a video RAM 207.

The CPU 202 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control device 81 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received commands to control the VDP 205 (specifically, generate an internal command for the VDP 205).

The program ROM 203 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 202, and is a non-volatile storage means that does not require external power supply for holding the stored information. The work RAM 204 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when executing various programs by the CPU 202, and is a volatile storage means that requires an external power supply to hold the stored information. Is.

The VDP 205 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display unit driver incorporated in the liquid crystal display device 65. Since the VDP205 is made into an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and its substance can be said to be a microcomputer chip having a built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 205 adjusts the timings of the CPU 202, the video RAM 207, and the like to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads the image data stored in the video RAM 207 from the character ROM 206 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the liquid crystal display device 65.

The character ROM 206 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as a pattern displayed on the liquid crystal display device 65. The character ROM 206 holds bitmap format image data of various display symbols, a color palette table to be referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like.

The video RAM 207 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 65, and the display contents of the liquid crystal display device 65 are changed based on rewriting the contents of the video RAM 207.

Subsequently, each control process executed by the CPU 102 of the main control device 101 will be described. The processing of the CPU 102 is roughly divided into a main processing that is started when the power is turned on, a timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (at a cycle of 1.49 msec in this embodiment), and a power failure signal to the NMI terminal. There is NMI interrupt processing that is activated in response to the input of. Hereinafter, among these processes, the processes related to the progress of the game, that is, the timer interrupt process and the normal process performed in the main process will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 41.

FIG. 14 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing periodically executed by the main control device 101, and a timer interrupt is generated by the CPU 102 of the main control device 101, for example, every 1.49 msec.

First, in the register save process shown in step S101, the values of all the registers in the CPU 102 used in the normal process described later are saved in the backup area of the RAM 106. In step S102, it is confirmed whether or not the power failure flag is set, and if the power failure flag is set, the process proceeds to step S103 to execute the power failure process.

Here, the power failure processing will be outlined.

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 91b of the power supply device 91, and the power failure signal is input to the main control device 101 via the NMI terminal. When a power failure signal is input, the main control device 101 immediately executes NMI interrupt processing and sets the power failure flag in the power failure flag storage area provided in the RAM 106.

In the power failure processing, it is first determined whether or not the command transmission is completed, and if the transmission is not completed, the main processing is terminated and the timer interrupt processing is restored, and the command transmission is terminated. When the transmission of the command is completed, the value of the stack pointer of the CPU 102 is saved in the backup area of the RAM 106. After that, the output state of the output port in the input / output port 104 is cleared, and all actuators (not shown) are turned off. Then, when the power failure is resolved, the RAM determination value for determining whether the data in the RAM 106 is normal is calculated and stored in the backup area, thereby prohibiting the subsequent RAM access. After performing the above processing, an infinite loop is entered in preparation for the fact that the power supply is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed. In consideration of the case where the power failure flag is erroneously set due to noise or the like, it is confirmed whether or not the power failure signal is output until the infinite loop is entered. If the power failure signal is not output, it means that the power has been restored from the power failure state. Therefore, writing to the RAM 106 is permitted, the power failure flag is reset, and the timer interrupt processing is restored. If the output of the power failure signal is continued, it goes into an infinite loop as it is. By the way, it is confirmed whether or not the power failure signal is output even under the infinite loop, and if the power failure signal is no longer output, the process shifts to the main process.

Returning to the description of the timer interrupt process, if the power failure flag is not set in step S102, various processes after step S104 are performed.

That is, in step S104, the watchdog timer clearing process for initializing the value of the watchdog timer for monitoring the occurrence of a malfunction is performed. In step S105, an interrupt end declaration process is performed so that the next timer interrupt can be set for the CPU 102 itself. In step S106, in order to rotate each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, a stepping motor control process for driving a stepping motor, which is a rotating cylinder drive motor, is performed. In step S107, the states of various sensors (see FIG. 12) such as the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, the input medal detection sensor 45a, and the payout detection sensor 51a connected to the input / output port 104 are read, and whether the read result is normal or not. Performs sensor monitoring processing to monitor. In step S108, a timer calculation process for subtracting the values of each counter and timer is performed. In step S109, counter processing is performed to output the result of counting the number of bets on medals and the number of payouts to the external centralized terminal board 121.

In step S110, a command output process for transmitting various commands such as a lottery result command described later to the sub control device 81 is performed. In step S111, a segment data setting process for setting segment data displayed on the credit display unit 60, the remaining payout number display unit 61, and the payout number display unit 62 is performed. In step S112, the segment data set in the segment data setting process is supplied to the display units 60 to 62, and the segment data display process for displaying the corresponding numbers, symbols, and the like is performed. In step S113, a port output process for outputting data corresponding to the I / O device from the input / output port 104 is performed. In step S114, the value of each register saved in the backup area in the previous step S101 is restored to the corresponding register in the CPU 102. After that, in step S115, an interrupt enable process for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed, and this series of timer interrupt processes is terminated.

Next, a normal process for performing main control related to the game will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S201, an interrupt enable process for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed. In step S202, pre-start processing is performed to enable the game. In the pre-start process, the sub-control device 81 or the like waits until the initialization is completed. When the initialization of the sub control device 81 or the like is completed, the game management process shown in steps S203 to S215 is performed.

As a game management process, in step S203, data such as various game information stored in the RAM 106 (for example, a random number value used in the previous game) is cleared. After that, in step S204, a start waiting process is performed.

In the start waiting process, it is determined whether or not any of the re-game winnings has been established in the previous game. If any of the re-game winnings is established, the automatic insertion process of automatically inserting the same number of virtual medals as the previous bet number is performed, and the start waiting process is ended. Specifically, if a re-game prize is established in a 3-bet game, three virtual medals are automatically inserted, and if a re-game prize is established in a one-bet game, one virtual medal is inserted. Performs the process of automatically inserting medals. By the way, in this embodiment, the re-game prize is not established in the 2-bet game, but if the game is transformed so that the re-game prize is established even in the 2-bet game, two cards are automatically inserted. It is advisable to set the virtual medal of to be automatically inserted.

In the automatic insertion process, virtual medals are inserted without reducing the number of virtual medals displayed on the credit display unit 60. That is, if any of the re-game prizes is established in the previous game, the player can play the current game without reducing the number of medals owned and without inserting medals. If none of the re-game winnings has been established, a sensor abnormality confirmation process for confirming whether or not an error has occurred in the sensor reading result performed in the sensor monitoring process step S107 of the timer interrupt process is performed. When an abnormality has occurred, the slot machine 10 is put into an error state, and an abnormality occurrence process for notifying the occurrence of the error is performed. This error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated. If the reading result of the sensor is normal, it is determined whether or not the checkout switch 59 has been operated, and if the checkout switch 59 is operated, the medal return process of paying out the same number of medals as the credited virtual medal. I do.

Whether or not the medal insertion or the credit insertion switches 56 to 58 have been operated between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process after the medal return process is completed or the settlement switch 59 is not operated. If any of these is performed, a medal insertion process for changing the number of bets is performed, and the start waiting process is terminated. Further, if neither the medal insertion nor the operation of the credit insertion switches 56 to 58 is performed between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process, the start waiting process is terminated as it is.

After the start waiting process is completed, in step S205, it is determined whether or not the number of bets on the medals has reached the specified number. In this slot machine 10, "2" is set as a specified number in the CB state, and a gaming state other than the CB state (specifically, a normal gaming state, a first RT state, a second RT state, a third RT state, BB) is set. "1" and "3" are set as the specified number in the state). That is, in the CB state, an affirmative judgment is made in step S205 on the condition that the number of bets is "2", and the condition is that the number of bets is "1" or "3" except in the CB state. In step S205, an affirmative judgment is made. In other words, in a gaming state other than the CB state, if the medal is not bet, or if the bet number is "2" even if the medal is bet, a negative determination is made in step S205. If the number of bets has not reached the specified number, the process returns to the process of waiting for the start in step S204, and the process after the sensor abnormality confirmation process is performed.

If the number of bets has reached the specified number, the mode transition notification process is executed in step S206. The transition notification process will be described in detail later.

After processing in step S206, a bet command including information on the processing result in step S206 and information on the number of bets determined to be affirmative in step S205 is sent to the sub control device 81 as the control device on the sub side. Set as the output target of. The command set here is output to the sub-control device 81 in step S110 in the timer interrupt processing. The processing of the sub-control device 81 that has received the bet command will be described in detail later.

After executing the process of step S207, it is determined in step S208 whether or not the start lever 41 has been operated. If the start lever 41 is not operated, the process returns to the start waiting process in step S204, and the process after the sensor abnormality confirmation process is performed.

On the other hand, when the start lever 41 is operated, the game can be started when the start lever 41 is operated in a situation where a specified number of medals are bet, so the game is started in order to start the game. It means that a command has occurred. In such a case, the effective line setting process for setting the combination line corresponding to the number of bets as the effective line is performed in step S209. That is, in the 3-bet game, only the right-down line L4 is set as the effective line, and in the 2-bet game, the lower line L3 and the right-down line L4 are set as the effective line. Further, in the 1-bet game, the bent line L6 is set as an effective line. In step S210, the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is switched to the non-excited state to prohibit bet acceptance. After that, the lottery process of step S211, the reel control process of step S212, the medal payout process of step S213, the RT state process of step S214, and the bonus state process of step S215 are executed in order, and the process returns to step S203.

Next, the lottery process in step S211 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S301, a random number used when determining whether or not the combination is correct is acquired. In the slot machine 10, when the start lever 41 is operated, the hard circuit is configured to latch the value of the free run counter at that time. The free run counter generates random numbers from 0 to 65535, and the CPU 102 stores the value latched by the hard circuit in the RAM 106 after confirming the operation of the start lever 41. With such a configuration, it is possible to quickly acquire random numbers at the timing when the start lever 41 is operated, and it is possible to avoid problems such as synchronization. The hard circuit of the slot machine 10 is configured to latch the value of the free run counter each time the start lever 41 is operated.

After acquiring the random numbers, in step S302, a lottery table for determining whether or not the winning combination is successful is selected. The slot machine 10 has six types of gaming states, which are roughly classified into a normal gaming state, a first RT state, a second RT state, a third RT state, a BB state, and a CB state.

That is, in step S302, the current gaming state of the slot machine 10 is determined based on the number of bets and the setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c, and the lottery table corresponding to the number of bets and the gaming state is selected. .. For example, when the number of bets is "3" and the setting flag is not set in the state information storage area 106c, it is determined that the current gaming state is the normal gaming state, and the lottery table for the normal gaming state is displayed. select. Further, in this slot machine 10, six stages of winning probabilities from "setting 1" to "setting 6" are prepared in advance, and a setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole to perform an ON operation and a predetermined operation. Thereby, it is possible to set which winning probability the internal processing is to be executed based on. In step S302, the lottery table having the lowest expected medal payout value is selected when the setting state is "setting 1", and the lottery table having the highest expected medal payout value is selected when the setting state is "setting 6".

The lottery table will be briefly described. FIG. 17 is a lottery table for a normal gaming state selected in the normal gaming state of “setting 3”. An index value IV is set in the lottery table, and each index value IV is uniquely associated with a winning combination and a point value PV is set.

After selecting the lottery table, the index value IV is set to 1 in step S303, and the determination value DV used when determining whether or not the combination is appropriate is set in the subsequent step S304. In this determination value setting process, a new determination value DV is set by adding the current index value IV and the corresponding point value PV to the current determination value DV. In the initial determination value setting process, the random value acquired in step S301 is used as the current determination value DV, and the current index value IV 1 and the corresponding point value PV are added to this random value to create a new value. The determination value is DV.

After that, in step S305, it is determined whether or not the combination corresponding to the index value IV is appropriate. In the winning / failing determination of the combination, it is determined whether or not the determination value DV exceeds 65535. If it exceeds 65535, the process proceeds to step S306, and the winning flag corresponding to the index value IV at that time is set in the winning flag storage area 106a of the RAM 106. For example, when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when IV = 20, in step S306, a winning flag indicating that the first small winning combination to the fifth small winning combination and the 14th small winning combination to the 17th small winning combination are won is set. It is set in the winning flag storage area 106a.

By the way, the winning flag indicating that the set winning flag has won the first BB (hereinafter referred to as "the first BB winning flag") or the winning flag indicating that the second BB has been won (hereinafter, the "second BB winning flag"). If not, the winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a is reset after the game in which the corresponding winning flag is set ends (see S203 in normal processing). On the other hand, when the winning flag is the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag, these winning flags are reset on condition that the corresponding winning is established. That is, the first BB winning flag and the second BB winning flag may be valid over a plurality of games. In step S306 in the state where the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag is carried over, the corresponding winning flag is set if the winning combination other than the first BB, the second BB, and the CB is won, and the first BB, the second BB, and the like are set. If you have not won a role other than CB, the corresponding winning flag will not be set.

If the determination value DV does not exceed 65535 in step S305, it means that the combination corresponding to the index value IV is lost. In such a case, the index value IV is added by 1 in step S307, and in the subsequent step S308, it is determined whether or not there is a role corresponding to the index value IV, that is, whether or not there is a determination target to be determined. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the added index value IV exceeds the maximum value of the index value IV set in the lottery table. If there is a determination target to be determined, the process returns to step S304 and the determination of the winning / failing of the winning combination is continued. At this time, in step S304, the current index value IV and the corresponding point value PV are added to the judgment value DV (that is, the current judgment value DV) used for the winning / failing judgment of the previous combination to obtain a new judgment value DV. In step S305, the winning / failing determination of the winning combination is performed based on the determination value DV. By the way, when the winning / failing judgment of the winning combination is performed using the lottery table shown in FIG. 17, the probability of winning the normal replay (probability of winning when IV = 1) is about 1/3, strong cherry. The probability of winning a prize (probability of winning when IV = 13) is about 1/263, and the probability of winning a weak cherry (probability of winning when IV = 14) is about 1/183. be. The probability of winning a watermelon (probability of winning when IV = 15) is about 1/154, and the probability of winning a chance A (probability of winning when IV = 16) is about 1/252. , The probability of winning the chance B (the probability of winning when IV = 17) is about 1/252. The probability of winning the middle bell (probability of winning when IV = 18) is about 1/32800, and the probability of winning the unquestioned bell (probability of winning when IV = 19) is about 65500 minutes. It is 1. The probability of winning the forward push bell 1, the forward push bell 2, the pinch push bell 1, and the pinch push bell 2 (probability of winning when IV = 20 to 23) is about 1/164, respectively, and the middle push bell 1, The probability of winning the middle push bell 2, the right push bell 1, and the right push bell 2 (probability of winning when IV = 24 to 27) is about 1 / 16.4, respectively. The probability of winning the strong cherry duplication 1 (probability of winning when IV = 31) is about 1/1770, and the probability of winning the strong cherry duplication 2 (probability of winning when IV = 32) is about 1/1770. Approximately 1 / 4680, the probability of winning the weak cherry duplication 1 (probability of winning when IV = 33) is about 1 / 3280, the probability of winning the weak cherry duplication 2 (when IV = 34) The probability of winning) is about 1/6550. The probability of winning the watermelon duplication 1 (probability of winning when IV = 35) is about 1/3280, and the probability of winning the watermelon duplication 2 (probability of winning when IV = 36) is about 6550. It is one-third. The probability of winning the chance A duplication 1, the chance A duplication 2, the chance B duplication 1, and the chance B duplication 2 (probability of winning when IV = 37 to 40) is about 1/3280, respectively. The probability of winning the middle bell duplication 1 and the middle bell duplication 2 (probability of winning when IV = 41, 42) is about 1/2620, respectively. The probability of winning a single prize in the first BB and the second BB (probability of winning when IV = 43, 44) is about 1/65500, respectively. The probability of winning the CB (probability of winning when IV = 45) is about 1 / 19.9. In addition, the probability of losing any of the roles is about 1/94.

In the normal game state lottery table, 0 is set for the point value PV of IV = 2 to 12, 28 to 30, 46 to 49. Therefore, in the normal gaming state, the winner is not won at these index values IV.

After setting the winning flag in step S306, or when it is determined in step S308 that there is no determination target to be determined, it means that the winning / failing determination of the winning combination is completed. In such a case, the process proceeds to step S309, and a freeze lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to execute a freeze effect that invalidates the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 for a predetermined period.

In the following step S310, the lottery result correspondence process is performed. In the lottery result handling process, processing for whether or not to shift the game state according to the result of the lottery in steps S301 to S309, processing for notifying the push order combination, and the like are performed. The lottery result handling process will be described in detail later.

After executing the process of step S310, the lottery result command is set in step S311. Here, the lottery result command is a command transmitted to the sub control device 81 in order to grasp the result of the winning / failing determination of the winning combination. However, in the normal processing, various commands such as the lottery result command are only set in the ring buffer, and the command is not transmitted to the sub control device 81. The command transmission to the sub-control device 81 is performed by the command output process (step S110) of the timer interrupt process described above.

Then, in step S312, a stop information setting process for setting the stop information for reel stop control is performed, and the lottery process is completed. In the stop information setting process, when a plurality of wins are won among the small wins, replays, and bonuses, the stop information is set in the order of priority shown below. If the small winning combination and the bonus are won, the stop information is set so that the small winning combination is given priority and the bonus winning is established when the small winning combination cannot be established. If the replay and bonus are won, the stop information is set so that the replay prize is prioritized.

Next, the reel control process in step S212 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the reel control process, first, the rotation effect process is performed in step S401. The rotation effect process is a process for performing an effect using reel control during the invalid period based on the result of the freeze lottery process performed in step S309. In step S402, a rotation start process for starting the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is performed.

In the rotation start process, it is confirmed whether or not a predetermined weight time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed from the time when the reel started rotation in the previous game, and if not, the weight time has elapsed. Wait until you do. When the weight time has elapsed, the weight time for the next game is reset, and the motor control initialization process for setting the rotation start information in the motor control storage area provided in the RAM 106 is performed. By performing such processing, the acceleration processing of the stepping motor is started in the stepping motor control processing (step S106) of the timer interrupt processing, and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start to rotate. Therefore, even if the player bets a predetermined number of medals and operates the start lever 41, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R may not start rotating immediately.

In step S403, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stand by until they rotate at a constant speed at a predetermined rotation speed, and it is determined whether or not the invalid period from the start of rotation has elapsed. If the invalid period has not elapsed, the process waits in step S403. When the rotation speed of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R becomes a constant speed and the invalid period has elapsed, it is possible to generate a stop command by lighting and displaying a lamp (not shown) of each stop switch 42 to 44. The player or the like is notified of the fact, and the process proceeds to step S404 to perform the valid flag setting process. The valid flag setting process is a process for setting an operation mode of the stop switches 42 to 44 that are valid when the stop operation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is performed. Such a setting process will be described in detail later.

After performing the valid flag setting process, it is determined in step S405 whether or not any of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated. If none of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated, it waits until any of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated. If it is determined that any of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S406, and it is determined whether or not the stop switch corresponding to the rotating reel has been operated, that is, whether or not a stop command has been generated. do. If the stop command has not been generated, the process returns to step S405 and waits until any of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated.

When the stop command is generated, the stop command correspondence process is executed in step S407. In the stop command correspondence process, a process for stopping the rotation of the reel corresponding to the reel in which the stop command is generated is performed. The corresponding processing will be described in detail later, but in the corresponding processing, the arrival symbol that has reached the reference position (lower stage in the present embodiment) at the timing when the stop switch is operated and the stop information storage area 106b. Based on the stored stop information, the number of slips of the reel to be stopped this time is calculated, and when the symbol corresponding to the calculated number of slips reaches the reference position, the rotation of the reel is stopped. In this case, in the slot machine 10, as a stop mode for stopping each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, the arrival symbol reaching the base point position is stopped as it is. , A stop mode in which the corresponding reel is slid by one symbol and then stopped, a stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding by two symbols, a stop mode in which the corresponding reel is slid by three symbols and then stopped, and a stop mode in which the corresponding reel is slid by four symbols. Five patterns of stop modes are prepared, one is a stop mode in which the reel is stopped after the reeling, and the reel stop control is performed in one of these stop modes.

After that, in step S408, it is determined whether or not all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped. If all reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not stopped, the stop information second setting process is performed in step S409, and the process returns to step S405.

Here, the stop information second setting process is a process of changing the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b of the RAM 106 after the reels are stopped. In the stop information second setting process, the stop information is changed based on the set winning flag and the stop result of the stopped reel. In this slot machine 10, for example, when winning when IV = 20 to 27, that is, forward push bell 1, forward push bell 2, pinch push bell 1, pinch push bell 2, middle push bell 1, middle push bell 2, right When the push bell 1 and the right push bell 2 (hereinafter, collectively referred to as "push order bells") are won (see FIG. 17), the stop switches 42 to 44 that generate the stop command. The stop information second setting process is performed in order to change the winning mode established depending on the operation order.

FIG. 19 is an explanatory diagram showing a correspondence relationship between the winning combination, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning mode. For example, when the middle push bell 1 is won, the stop information is set so that the second small winning combination or the fifth small winning combination is established when the left stop switch 42 is operated for the first time, and the middle stop switch 43 is set. Set the stop information so that the first small winning combination is established when is first operated, and the second small winning combination or the fifth small winning combination is established when the right stop switch 44 is operated first. Set stop information. However, even when the stop information is set in this way, the corresponding prize may not be established depending on the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44.

The symbol arrangement of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R will be briefly described. In this slot machine 10, in a gaming state (3-bet game) other than the CB state, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R can be stopped after sliding the reels 32L, 32M, 32R by a maximum of 4 symbols from the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. , Only the downward-sloping line L4 is set as an effective line. Therefore, when the spacing between the symbols of the same type is 4 or less on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the winning symbol is valid when the winning symbol is obtained regardless of the operation timing of the stop switch 43. Can be stopped on the line. On the other hand, for symbols arranged so as to form sections separated by 5 symbols or more, it is necessary for the player to operate the stop switches 42 to 44 aiming at the symbols when stopping on the effective line.

A case where the middle push bell 1 is won and the left stop switch 42 → the middle stop switch 43 → the right stop switch 44 are operated in this order will be described as an example. In such a case, the stop control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is performed in order to establish the second small winning combination winning or the fifth small winning combination winning.

The second small winning combination symbol on the left reel 32L is a "red bell" symbol and a "white bell" symbol. In addition, the "red bell" symbol and the "white bell" symbol also have a function as the fifth small winning combination symbol. The left reel 32L is arranged so that the distance between the second small winning symbols (fifth small winning symbols) is 4 or less. Therefore, when the left stop switch 42 is operated for the first time, the "red bell" symbol or the "white bell" symbol is stopped in the upper row regardless of the operation timing. For example, when the left stop switch 42 is operated at the timing when the 8th "watermelon" symbol of the left reel 32L reaches the lower stage, as shown in FIG. 20A, the 12th "white bell" The design stops at the top. As a result, there remains room for the second small winning combination or the fifth small winning combination to be established on the downward-sloping line L4.

The second small winning combination symbol of the medium reel 32M is the "red 7" symbol. On the middle reel 32M, the "red 7" symbol is arranged only at the 18th position. Further, the fifth small winning combination symbol of the medium reel 32M is a "cherry" symbol. On the middle reel 32M, "cherry" symbols are arranged at positions 11 and 14. Therefore, depending on the operation timing of the middle stop switch 43, the second small winning combination symbol or the fifth small winning combination symbol may stop on the effective line, or both the second small winning combination symbol and the fifth small winning combination symbol may be on the effective line. It doesn't stop.

Specifically, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated at the timing when any of the 6th "white bell" symbol to the 13th "1st replay" symbol reaches the lower stage, the 5th small winning combination symbol The barrel "cherry" pattern stops in the middle. As a result, there is room for the fifth small winning combination to be established on the downward-sloping line L4. When the middle stop switch 43 is operated at the timing when any of the 14th "cherry" symbol to the 17th "first replay" symbol reaches the lower stage, as shown in FIG. 20 (b), the first 2 The "Red 7" symbol, which is a small role symbol, stops in the middle row. As a result, there is room for the second small winning combination to be established on the downward-sloping line L4. If the middle stop switch 43 is operated at another timing, the second small winning combination symbol and the fifth small winning combination symbol may be stopped in the middle stage even if the middle reel 32M is slid by four symbols and then stopped. Can not. When the middle stop switch 43 is operated at such a timing, the No. 2 "BAR" symbol or the No. 6 "white bell" symbol is stopped in the middle stage.

When the second small winning combination symbol of the middle reel 32M is stopped in the middle stage, the stop information is changed in the stop information second setting process so that the second small winning combination winning can be established.

The second small winning combination symbol of the right reel 32R is the "red 7" symbol. On the right reel 32R, the "red 7" symbol is arranged only at the 18th position. Therefore, depending on the operation timing of the right stop switch 44, the second small winning combination symbol may or may not stop on the effective line. Specifically, when the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when any of the 14th "watermelon" symbol to the 18th "red 7" symbol reaches the lower stage, it is shown in FIG. 20 (c). As such, the second small role symbol "Red 7" symbol stops at the bottom. As a result, the second small winning combination is established on the downward-sloping line L4. If the right stop switch 44 is operated at another timing, the "watermelon" symbol stops at the bottom. For example, when the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when the 13th "cherry" symbol reaches the lower row, the 14th "watermelon" symbol is in the lower row as shown in FIG. 20 (d). Stop. From the left, the combination of the "white bell" symbol, the "red 7" symbol, and the "watermelon" symbol is a transitional roll as shown in FIG.

When the fifth small winning combination symbol of the middle reel 32M is stopped in the middle stage, the stop information is changed in the stop information second setting process so that the fifth small winning combination winning can be established.

The fifth small winning combination symbol on the right reel 32R is the "second replay" symbol. On the right reel 32R, the "second replay" symbol is arranged at the 0th and 3rd positions. Therefore, depending on the operation timing of the right stop switch 44, the fifth small winning combination symbol may or may not stop on the effective line. Specifically, when the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when any of the 17th "BAR" symbol to the 3rd "second replay" symbol reaches the lower stage, it is the 5th small winning combination symbol. The "second replay" symbol stops at the bottom. As a result, the fifth small winning combination is established on the downward-sloping line L4. If the right stop switch 44 is operated at another timing, the "watermelon" symbol stops at the bottom. From the left, the combination of the "white bell" symbol, the "cherry" symbol, and the "watermelon" symbol is a transitional roll as shown in FIG.

When the 2nd small winning combination symbol and the 5th small winning combination symbol of the middle reel 32M do not stop in the middle stage, that is, when the "BAR" symbol or the "white bell" symbol of the middle reel 32M stops in the middle stage, the stop information 2nd In the setting process, the stop information is changed so that the "watermelon" symbol stops at the bottom.

The "watermelon" symbols are arranged on the right reel 32R so that the distance between the "watermelon" symbols is 4 or less. Therefore, when the right stop switch 44 is operated, the "watermelon" symbol is stopped at the lower stage regardless of the operation timing. From the left, the combination of the "white bell" symbol, "BAR" symbol, and "watermelon" symbol, and from the left, the combination of the "white bell" symbol, "white bell" symbol, and "watermelon" symbol are as shown in FIG. It is a transition to.

In this way, when the middle push bell 1 is won and the left stop switch 42 → the middle stop switch 43 → the right stop switch 44 are operated in this order, the second small winning combination is established and the fifth small winning combination is established. It will be either the case where the winning is established or the case where the transition roll is stopped.

Next, a case where the middle push bell 1 is won and the middle stop switch 43 → the left stop switch 42 → the right stop switch 44 are operated in this order will be described as an example. In such a case, stop control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is performed in order to establish the first small winning combination.

On the middle reel 32M, the "red bell" symbol, which is the first small winning combination symbol, is arranged so that the distance between the "red bell" symbols is 4 or less. Therefore, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated for the first time, the "red bell" symbol is stopped in the middle stage regardless of the operation timing.

On the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol and the "white bell" symbol, which are the first small winning symbols, are arranged so that the distance between the first small winning symbols is 4 or less. Therefore, when the left stop switch 42 is operated second, the "red bell" symbol or the "white bell" symbol is stopped in the upper row regardless of the operation timing.

On the right reel 32R, the "red bell" symbol, which is the first small winning combination symbol, is arranged so that the distance between the "red bell" symbols is 4 or less. Therefore, when the right stop switch 44 is operated third, the "red bell" symbol is stopped at the lower stage regardless of the operation timing.

As described above, when the middle push bell 1 is won and the middle stop switch 43 → the left stop switch 42 → the right stop switch 44 are operated in this order, the first small winning combination prize is established regardless of the operation timing.

If the push order bell is won, if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in one or two predetermined operation orders, the first small winning combination is established regardless of the operation timing. When the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in another operation order, the small winning combination is established or the shift roll is stopped on the valid line depending on the operation timing. By the way, if the middle bell is won, the 29th small winning combination is established regardless of the operation order and operation timing, and if the unquestioned bell is won, the second is regardless of the operation order and operation timing. 1 Small winning combination is established.

Returning to the description of the reel control process, if it is determined in step S408 that all reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, the payout determination process is performed in step S410. The payout determination process is a process of setting the number of medals to be paid out on the condition that the combinations of winning symbols are lined up on the valid line. In the payout determination process, a combination of symbols formed on the valid line is derived from the symbol number of the stopped symbol stopped at the lower stage of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and whether or not a prize is established on the valid line is determined. judge. If the winning is established, it is further determined whether or not the winning winning combination corresponds to the winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a. When the winning winning combination corresponds to the winning flag, the winning winning combination and the number of payouts corresponding to the winning winning combination are set in the payout information storage area provided in the RAM 106. On the other hand, if the winning combination does not correspond to the winning flag, the slot machine 10 is put into an error state and an abnormality occurrence process for notifying the occurrence of an error is performed. This error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated.

After the payout determination process is performed, the winning result handling process is performed in step S411. In the winning result handling process, a process of shifting the gaming state based on the winning result is performed. The processing for dealing with the winning result will be described in detail later.

After the winning result handling process is performed, the winning result command is set in step S412 so that the sub control device 81 grasps the winning winning combination in this game, and the reel control process is terminated.

Next, the medal payout process in step S213 will be outlined.

In the medal payout process, it is determined whether or not the number of payouts set in the payout information storage area is 0. When the number of payouts is 0, it means that it is determined that the small winning combination has not been established in the previous payout determination process. In such a case, it is determined whether or not any one of the first re-game prize to the eighth re-game prize is established based on the winning combination set in the payout determination process. If none of the re-game prizes are established, the medal payout process is terminated as it is, and if any of the re-game prizes is established, the re-game setting process is performed to change the game state to the re-game state. , End the medal payout process. In the start waiting process (step S204) described above, the automatic input process is performed when it is determined that the current gaming state is the re-gaming state.

On the other hand, if the number of payouts set in the payout information storage area is not 0, the same number of medals as the number of payouts is paid out, and the medal payout process is completed. Regarding the payout of medals Specifically, if the count value of the credit counter has not reached the upper limit (the number of stored medals is 50), the number of payouts is added to the count value of the credit counter and the value after addition is added. It is displayed on the credit display unit 60. If the count value of the credit counter has reached the upper limit, or if the count value reaches the upper limit during the addition of the number of payouts, the rotating plate for paying medals is driven and the medals are ejected from the hopper device 51. Pay out to the medal tray 50 via the exit 49. In the medal payout process, the number of payouts displayed on the payout number display unit 62 is also changed according to the payout of medals. When the current gaming state is the BB state, the number of payouts is subtracted from the value of the remaining payout number counter, which will be described later, and the number of remaining payouts displayed on the remaining payout number display unit 61 is subtracted. ..

Next, the RT state processing in step S214 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S501, it is determined whether or not the transition roll has stopped on the valid line. When the transition roll is stopped, the process proceeds to step S502, and it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the normal gaming state. When the current gaming state is the normal gaming state, the first RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c of the RAM 106 in step S503. After that, this process ends. If it is determined in step S501 that the shift roll has not stopped on the valid line, the process proceeds to step S504, and the second replay winning combination is awarded based on the winning winning combination set in the previous payout determination process. Determine if it holds. When the second re-game winning is established, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S505, and the first RT setting flag is set in step S503. After that, this process ends. Further, when the transition to the effective line is stopped in a game state other than the normal game state, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S505, and the step S503 is performed. The first RT setting flag is set, and this process ends.

When the first RT setting flag is set in step S503, the gaming state shifts to the first RT state. Then, in step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current gaming state is the first RT state based on the fact that the first RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, and the lottery table for the first RT state is selected. do.

FIG. 22 is a lottery table for the first RT state selected in the first RT state of “setting 3”. The lottery table for the first RT state differs from the lottery table for the normal gaming state (see FIG. 17) in the point value PV of IV = 1 to 5, and has the same point value PV as the other index value IV. Is set. Therefore, when the winning or losing of the winning combination is determined using the lottery table, the probability of winning when IV = 6 to 49 is equal to the winning probability of each winning in the normal gaming state, and winning when IV = 1. The probability of winning is about 1 in 67.0, and the probability of winning when IV = 2 to 5 is about 1 in 32.8, respectively. The odds of not winning any of the roles are about 1 in 1.94.

Here, as shown in FIG. 22, if the winner is won when IV = 1, the normal replay is won, and when the winner is IV = 2, the first promotion replay 1 is won, and the IV. If you win when = 3, you will win the first promotion replay 2, if you win when IV = 4, you will win the first promotion replay 3, and if you win IV = 5, you will win. In that case, the first promotion replay 4 will be won. The probability of winning in any of IV = 1 to 5 is about 1/7.30. The normal replay winning probability under the normal game state is also about 1/7.30. In other words, when the gaming state shifts to the 1st RT state, each winning combination of small role, replay, and bonus will be won with the same probability as the normal game state, while the privilege of replay is given. Changes to something different from the normal game state. More specifically, in the normal gaming state, only the first re-gaming prize that does not shift to the gaming state is established, and in the first RT state, in addition to the first re-gaming prize, the third re-gaming prize that shifts to the second RT state is established. To establish.

In the stop information second setting process (step S409), a stop command is generated when the first promotion replay 1 to the first promotion replay 4 are won in addition to the case where the push order bell described above is won. Stop information is set so as to change the winning mode established by the operation order of the stopped switches 42 to 44.

FIG. 23A is an explanatory diagram showing a correspondence relationship between the winning combination, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning mode established. When the first promotion replay 1 to the first promotion replay 4 are won, unlike the case where the push order bell is won, the first replay prize or the first replay prize is won regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. The third re-game prize is always established. In the first promotion replay 1 to the first promotion replay 4, the third replay is associated with one of the six operation sequences, and the first replay corresponds to the other operation sequences. It is attached.

In the first promotion replays 2 to 4, in addition to the first replay and the third replay, the sixth replay, the seventh replay, and the eighth replay are also assigned as winning combinations. However, none of the above six operation sequences is associated with the sixth re-game to the eighth re-game. Therefore, the 6th re-game to the 8th re-game will not win a prize regardless of the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 even if the first promotion replays 2 to 4 are won.

More specifically, in the first promotion replays 1 to 4, the first promotion replay 1 is divided into the first replay and the third replay, respectively, and the first promotion replay 2 is the first replay and the first replay. The 6th replay is assigned in addition to the 3 replays, the 1st promotion replay 3 is assigned the 7th replay in addition to the 1st replay and the 3rd replay, and the 1st promotion replay 4 is assigned. Although the 8th re-game is assigned in addition to the 1st re-game and the 3rd re-game, the re-games to be won are the 1st re-game and the 3rd re-game regardless of which of the 1st promotion replays 1 to 4. It is one of the games. This is to make it difficult to understand the operation order in which the third replay prize is established. That is, for example, if the first promotion replay is one type, the operation order corresponding to the third replay prize is also one type, and the third replay prize is intentionally established when the first promotion replay is won. This is because it can be possible to make it. It should be noted that this relationship is not limited to the relationship of the first promotion replays 1 to 4, and the same can be said for other duplicate roles.

Returning to the explanation of the RT state processing, if it is determined in step S504 that the second replay winning combination has not been established, the process proceeds to step S506, and based on the winning winning combination set in the previous payout determination process, It is determined whether or not the third re-game prize has been established. When the third re-game winning is established, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S507, and the second RT setting flag is set in step S508 to end this process. do.

When the second RT setting flag is set in step S508, the gaming state shifts to the second RT state. Then, in step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current gaming state is the second RT state based on the fact that the second RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, and the lottery table for the second RT state is selected. do.

FIG. 24 is a lottery table for the second RT state selected in the second RT state of “setting 3”. When compared with the lottery table for the first RT state (see FIG. 22), the lottery table for the second RT state has a different point value PV of IV = 1 to 10, and the same point value PV as the other index value IV. Is set. Therefore, when the winning or losing of the winning combination is determined using the lottery table, the probability of winning when IV = 11 to 49 is equal to the winning probability of each winning in the first RT state, and winning when IV = 1. The probability of winning is about 1 / 13.2, and the probability of winning when IV = 2-5 is not won, and the probability of winning when IV = 6-8 is about 1 / 10.5, IV = 9, respectively. , The probability of winning at 10 is about 1/7.00, respectively. The probability of losing any of the roles is about 1/150. That is, when the player shifts to the second RT state, the probability of deviation is lower than that of the normal gaming state and the first RT state, which is advantageous to the player. Further, in the 2nd RT state, in addition to the 1st re-game winning that does not shift to the gaming state, the 2nd re-gaming prize that shifts to the 1st RT state, the 4th re-gaming prize that shifts to the 3rd RT state, and the 5th re-gaming Winning and is established.

In the stop information second setting process (step S409), in addition to the case where the first promotion replay 1 to the first promotion replay 4 described above are won, the fall replay 1 to the fall replay 3, the second promotion replay 1, the second 2 Even when the promotion replay 2 is won, the stop information is set so as to change the winning mode established by the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 that have generated the stop command.

FIG. 23B is an explanatory diagram showing a correspondence relationship between the winning combination, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning mode. When the fall replay 1 to the fall replay 3 are won, the first re-game prize or the second re-game prize is always established regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. If the second promotion replay 1 is won, one of the first re-game prize, the fourth re-game prize, and the fifth re-game prize is always established regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. .. When the second promotion replay 2 is won, the first re-game prize or the fourth re-game prize is always established regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44.

In addition, the number attached to the 4th re-game in the figure corresponds to the symbol combination when the 4th re-game winning is established. "1" corresponds to a symbol combination that is a random pattern, "2" corresponds to a symbol combination that is a different color 7 symbol middle stop, and "3" is a symbol that is red 7, red 7, and BAR middle stop. Corresponding to the combination, "4" corresponds to the symbol combination of white 7, white 7, and BAR middle stage stop (see FIG. 11). For example, if the left stop switch 42 is operated for the first time when the second promotion replay 1 is won, the symbol combination that becomes a disparity is stopped and the fourth replay prize is established, or a unique 7 The symbol combination that stops in the middle of the symbol stops, and the 4th re-game prize is established.

Returning to the explanation of the RT state processing, if it is determined in step S506 that the third replay winning combination has not been established, the process proceeds to step S509, and based on the winning winning combination set in the previous payout determination processing, It is determined whether or not the 4th re-game prize or the 5th re-game prize has been established. If the 4th re-game prize and the 5th re-game prize are not established, this process is terminated as it is. When the 4th re-game prize or the 5th re-game prize is established, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S510, and the 3rd RT setting flag is set in step S511. Then, this process is terminated.

When the 3rd RT setting flag is set in step S511, the gaming state shifts to the 3rd RT state. Then, in step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current gaming state is the third RT state based on the fact that the third RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, and the lottery table for the third RT state is selected. do.

FIG. 25 is a lottery table for the third RT state selected in the third RT state of “setting 3”. The lottery table for the 3rd RT state differs from the lottery table for the 2nd RT state (see FIG. 24) in the point value PV of IV = 9 to 12, and has the same point value PV as the other index value IV. Is set. Therefore, when the winning / failing of the winning combination is determined using the lottery table, the probability of winning when IV = 1 to 8, 13 to 49 is equal to the winning probability in the second RT state, and IV = 9,10. At that time, it will not be won, and the probability of winning at IV = 11 and 12 will be about 1/7.00, respectively. The probability of losing any of the roles is about 1/150. That is, when the gaming state shifts to the 3rd RT state, the winning mode is that the small winning combination, the re-gaming, and the bonus are won with the same probability as the 2nd RT state, while the privilege of the re-gaming is given. Changes to something different from the second RT state. More specifically, in the 3rd RT state, in addition to the 1st re-gaming prize that does not shift to the gaming state, the 2nd re-gaming prize that shifts to the 1st RT state, and the 6th re-gaming prize that does not shift to the gaming state, 7 Re-game prize, 8 re-game prize, and 3rd re-game prize that shifts to the 2nd RT state are established.

In the stop information second setting process (step S409), even when the BAR replay 1 and the BAR replay 2 are won, the winning mode established by the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 that generated the stop command is changed. Set the stop information.

FIG. 23 (c) is an explanatory diagram showing a correspondence relationship between the winning combination, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning mode established. If BAR Replay 1 is won, any of the 1st re-game prize, the 6th re-game prize, the 7th re-game prize, and the 3rd re-game prize, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. Is always true. If BAR Replay 2 is won, any one of the 1st re-game prize, the 6th re-game prize, the 8th re-game prize, and the 3rd re-game prize, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. Is always true.

Next, the bonus state processing in step S215 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S601, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is a bonus state, that is, whether or not the current gaming state is a BB state or a CB state. If it is not in the bonus state, the bonus determination process shown in steps S602 to S614 is performed.

In the bonus determination process, it is determined in step S602 whether or not any of the first BB winning flag, the second BB winning flag, and the CB winning flag is set. If any of the winning flags is set, the process proceeds to step S603, and it is determined whether or not the CB winning is established based on the winning winning combination set in the previous payout determination process. If the CB prize is established, the CB setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c in step S604. In step S605, 15 is set in the remaining payout number counter for counting the number of remaining medals that can be paid out during the bonus state provided in the state information storage area 106c. By performing the processes of steps S604 to S605, the gaming state shifts to the CB state.

Here, the CB and the CB state will be briefly described.

If the "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line, CB It will be a prize. The CB symbols are arranged on the reels 32L, 32M, 32R so that the distance between the CB symbols is 4 or less. Therefore, when the CB is won, the CB prize is established regardless of the operation order and operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44.

When the CB setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, the main control device 101 determines that the game state is the CB state. Then, in step S205 of the normal processing, it is determined whether or not the number of bets of the medal has reached "2" instead of "3", and in the effective line setting processing (step S207), the lower line L3 and the downward-sloping line L4 are determined. Is set as a valid line.

In step S302 of the lottery process, the lottery table for the CB state is selected. Although the illustration of the CB state lottery table is omitted, in the CB state lottery table, "0" is set as the point value PV of IV = 1 to 45, and "16384" is set as the point value of IV = 46 to 49. Is set (see Fig. 17 etc. for the correspondence between IV and the winning combination). Therefore, in the CB state, the probability of winning the CB small and medium-sized combination 1 (probability of winning when IV = 46) is about 1/4.0, and the probability of winning the CB small and medium-sized combination 2 (IV = 47). (Probability of winning at the time) is about 1/4.00, and probability of winning the CB small and medium-sized role 3 (probability of winning at IV = 48) is about 1/4.0, CB The probability of winning the small and medium-sized role 4 (the probability of winning when IV = 49) is about 1/4.00. No outlier event occurs.

FIG. 27A is an explanatory diagram showing a correspondence relationship between the winning combination, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning mode. Although detailed explanation is omitted, even if any of the CB small and medium-sized winning combination 1 to the CB small and medium-sized winning combination 4 is won, some small winning combination will be won regardless of the operation order and operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. It always holds. Since the CB state is a 2-bet game, if the 1st small role prize, the 18th small role prize, the 19th small role prize, and the 25th small role prize are established, 15 medals will be paid out and the first If 2 small winning combination to 17th small winning combination and 20th small winning combination to 24th small winning combination are established, 14 medals will be paid out. That is, when the state shifts to the CB state, 14 or 15 medals are always paid out.

In addition, in place of or in addition to the CB as a winning combination and the CB state as a gaming state, a single bonus (SB) that enables a game (JAC game) of one game to be executed as a winning combination, and a single bonus winning (winning). ) May be provided for the transition SB state. Further, the CB and CB states may be referred to as MB and MB states.

Returning to the explanation of the bonus state processing, when it is determined in step S603 that the CB winning has not been established, it means that the bonus winning flag other than the CB is set. In such a case, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S608, and it is determined in step S609 whether or not the first BB prize or the second BB prize is established.

Then, when any of the BB winnings is established, the BB winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a of the RAM 106 is cleared in step S610, and the BB is set in the state information storage area 106c in step S611. The flag is set. After that, in step S612, 216 is set in the remaining payout number counter, and 216 is displayed on the remaining payout number display unit 61. The numerical value set in step S612 is a numerical value corresponding to the upper limit payout number in the BB state, and the BB state is terminated on condition that medals equal to or higher than the numerical value are paid out in the BB state.

By performing the processes of steps S610 to S612, the gaming state shifts to the BB state. Then, in step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current gaming state is the BB state based on the fact that the BB setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, and the corresponding BB state lottery table is selected. ..

FIG. 28 is a lottery table for the BB state selected in the BB state to be transferred in the first BB and the second BB. In the BB state lottery table, "0" is set as the point value PV of IV = 1 to 27, 31 to 49, and "21845" is set as the point value of IV = 28 to 30. Therefore, in the BB state, the probability of winning the BB small and medium-sized winning combination 1 (the probability of winning when IV = 28) is about 1/3.00, and the probability of winning the BB medium-red 7 matching combination (IV). The probability of winning when = 29 is about 1 / 3.00, and the probability of winning the BAR matching role in BB (probability of winning when IV = 30) is about 1/3.00. Will be. The probability of losing any of the roles is about 1/65500.

FIG. 27B is an explanatory diagram showing a correspondence relationship between the winning combination, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning mode. As described above, the first small winning combination prize is a winning mode that can be established regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. Therefore, regardless of whether the BB medium / small combination 1, BB medium red 7 matching combination, or BB medium BAR matching combination is won, the first small is irrespective of the operation order and operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. Either the winning combination, the 30th minor winning combination, or the 31st minor winning combination is always established. Since the BB state is a 3-bet game, 9 medals are paid out when the 1st small winning combination, the 30th small winning combination, and the 31st small winning combination are established. Since the probability of loss in the BB state is about 1/65500, it can be said that the BB state is a gaming state in which nine medals are paid out with a very high probability.

When the gaming state shifts to the CB state or the BB state, an affirmative determination is made in step S601, and an end determination process is performed in step S613. In the end determination process, it is determined whether or not the value of the remaining payout number counter becomes 0, and if it becomes 0, the process of clearing the CB setting flag or the BB setting flag is performed. Further, in the end determination process, when the BB setting flag is cleared, the end flag indicating that the BB state has ended in this game is set. The end determination process will be described in detail later.

As shown in steps S602 to S613, when the CB is won and the CB prize is established, the CB setting flag is set without clearing the RT setting flag. Therefore, when the CB setting flag is cleared, that is, when the CB state is completed, the game state at the time when the CB winning is established is restored. For example, if the CB prize is established under the normal gaming state, the game returns to the normal gaming state after the end of the CB state, and if the CB prize is established under the third RT state, the third RT state is established after the end of the CB state. Return to. On the other hand, when the first BB and the second BB are won, the RT setting flag is cleared in step S608 regardless of whether or not the corresponding BB winning is established. Therefore, when the BB setting flag is cleared, that is, when the BB state ends, even if the first BB prize is established under the second RT state, the game state shifts to the normal gaming state. By the way, in the case of shifting to the CB state, the player can expect an increase of 13 (= 15-2) or 25 (= 14-2 + 15-2) medals until the end of the CB state. When shifting to the BB state, the player can expect an increase of about 144 (= 9 × 24-3 × 24) medals by the time the BB state ends.

When none of the 1st BB winning flag, the 2nd BB winning flag, and the CB winning flag is set (when step S602 is NO), and when none of the 1st BB winning, the 2nd BB winning, and the CB winning is established (when none of the 1st BB winning flag, the 2nd BB winning flag, and the CB winning flag is established (when the 1st BB winning flag, the 2nd BB winning flag, and the CB winning flag are not set). (When step S609 is NO), when a predetermined value is set in the remaining payout number counter in step S605 and step S612, and when the end determination process is performed in step S613, the process proceeds to step S606. Set the status command. Here, the state command is a command transmitted to the sub control device 81 in order to grasp the game state at the end of the game (that is, the game state of the next game), and in step S606, the state information storage area. Set the status command corresponding to the setting flag set in 106c. After setting the state command, in step S607, an external signal setting process for setting an external signal to be output from the external centralized terminal board 121 to the outside of the slot machine 10 is performed. After that, this process ends.

<Overview of game state transition and display mode>
Here, the transition of the gaming state will be described with reference to FIG. 29. The CB state is not shown.

When the gaming state is the BB state, the BB state ends when the number of medals paid out under the BB state reaches 216, and the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state.

When the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the gaming state shifts to the first RT state when the transition roll stops on the valid line, and the gaming state shifts to the BB state when the BB winning is established. The transition roll will stop on the valid line if a miss occurs in the game that wins the push order bell. In the lottery process using the normal game state lottery table, the first promotion replays 1 to 4 that trigger the transition to the second RT state and the second promotion replays 1 and 2 that trigger the transition to the third RT state are not won. Therefore, the normal gaming state does not shift to the second RT state and the third RT state (see FIG. 17).

When the gaming state is the first RT state, the gaming state shifts to the second RT state when the third re-game winning is established. The third re-game prize is established when one of the first promotion replay 1 to the first promotion replay 4 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined operation order (see FIG. 23 (a)). .. In the lottery process using the lottery table for the 1st RT state, the 2nd promotion replays 1 and 2 that trigger the transition to the 3rd RT state are not won, so that the 1st RT state does not shift to the 3rd RT state.

In addition, when the corresponding BB winning flag is not established in the game in which each BB winning flag is set, that is, when the BB winning flag is carried over, the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state, and each 1BB winning flag is set. When the corresponding BB prize is established in the set game, the game state shifts to the BB state. The first RT state does not shift to the third RT state.

When the gaming state is the 2nd RT state, the gaming state shifts to the 3rd RT state when the 4th re-gaming prize or the 5th re-game winning is established. Further, the game state shifts to the first RT state depending on whether the second re-game winning is established or the transition roll is stopped on the valid line. The 4th re-game prize and the 5th re-game prize are established when the 2nd promotion replay 1 or the 2nd promotion replay 2 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined operation order (FIG. 23 (b). )reference). The second re-game prize is established when any of the fall replay 1 to the fall replay 3 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined operation order (see FIG. 23 (b)). The transition roll will stop on the valid line if a miss occurs in the game that wins the push order bell. In addition, if the corresponding BB winning flag is not established in the game in which each BB winning flag is set, that is, if the BB winning flag is carried over, the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state, and each BB winning flag is set. When the corresponding BB prize is established in the game in which is set, the gaming state shifts to the BB state.

When the gaming state is the 3rd RT state, the gaming state shifts to the 2nd RT state when the 3rd re-game winning is established. Further, the game state shifts to the first RT state depending on whether the second re-game winning is established or the transition roll is stopped on the valid line. The third replay prize is established when the BAR replay 1 or the BAR replay 2 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined operation order (see FIG. 23 (c)). The second re-game prize is established when any of the fall replay 1 to the fall replay 3 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined operation order (see FIG. 23 (b)). The transition roll will stop on the valid line if a miss occurs in the game that wins the push order bell. In addition, if the corresponding BB winning flag is not established in the game in which each winning flag is set, that is, if the BB winning flag is carried over, the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state, and each BB winning flag is set. When the corresponding BB prize is established in the set game, the game state shifts to the BB state.

Incidentally, when each BB winning flag is carried over, a lottery table for carry-over (not shown) is used as the lottery table in the lottery process (FIG. 16). In the carry-over lottery table, the PV values of IV1 to 22 are the same as the PV values of IV1 to 22 in the normal game state lottery table (FIG. 17), and the PV values after IV23 are set to 0. ing. In other words, in the carry-over lottery table, bonuses and small wins that overlap with bonuses are not won.

In the slot machine 10, the main control device 101 manages six types of gaming states: a normal gaming state, a first RT state, a second RT state, a third RT state, a BB state, and a CB state, and is roughly classified into a normal mode and a challenge mode. , Attack mode, VB mode (including addition special zone), and BB mode are managed by the main control device 101.

FIG. 30 is a diagram showing the transition of each display mode.

The BB mode is a display mode that shifts when the first BB prize or the second BB prize is established and ends when the BB state ends. That is, the BB mode is a display mode corresponding to the BB state. Therefore, when shifting to the BB mode, the player can expect an increase of about 144 medals.

When the mode is changed from the normal mode or the challenge mode to the BB mode, the lottery for shifting to the challenge mode and the lottery for shifting to the attack mode are performed in the BB mode. If you win the lottery to shift to the attack mode, you will shift to the attack mode after the end of the BB mode, and if you win the lottery to shift to the challenge mode, you will shift to the challenge mode after the end of the BB mode. If none of the transition lottery is won, the mode shifts to the normal mode after the end of the BB mode. When the attack mode is changed to the BB mode, the attack mode is restored after the BB mode is finished. When the mode shifts from the VB mode to the BB mode, the mode returns to the VBB mode after the BB mode ends.

The normal mode is when the push order bell is won, 1st promotion replay 1 to 1st promotion replay 4, fall replay 1 to fall replay 3, 2nd promotion replay 1, 2nd promotion replay 2, BAR replay 1, BAR replay. 2 (hereinafter, these are collectively referred to as "push order replay") This is a display mode in which the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not notified at the time of winning. In the normal mode, a lottery for shifting to the challenge mode and a lottery for shifting to the attack mode are performed. Transition to challenge mode If the lottery is won, the mode shifts from the normal mode to the challenge mode, and if the lottery for transition to the attack mode is won, the mode shifts from the normal mode to the attack mode. The normal mode does not shift to the VB mode.

The normal mode corresponds to each gaming state of the normal gaming state, the first RT state, the second RT state, the third RT state, and the CB state. However, in the normal mode, since the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not notified at the time of winning the push order bell and at the time of winning the push order replay, it is rare to shift to the second RT state and the third RT state. It corresponds to almost the normal gaming state or the first RT state. In the normal mode, when the gaming state at that time is the normal gaming state or the first RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals is reduced by about 1.59 for each game played, and the gaming state at that time is the second RT state or the first RT state. In the third RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals will decrease by about 0.06 for each game played.

The challenge mode is a display mode in which the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not notified when the push order bell is won and when the push order replay is won, as in the normal mode. In the challenge mode, a lottery for transition to the attack mode is performed. However, the winning probability of the lottery for shifting to the attack mode in the challenge mode is set higher than the winning probability of the lottery for shifting to the attack mode in the normal mode. That is, the challenge mode is set as a mode in which the operation order is not notified as in the normal mode, but it is easy to shift to the attack mode. Transition to attack mode If you win the lottery, you will transition from challenge mode to attack mode. If the game is played a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) without winning the transition lottery, the challenge mode is shifted to the normal mode. The challenge mode does not shift to VB mode.

The challenge mode corresponds to each gaming state of the normal gaming state, the first RT state, the second RT state, the third RT state, and the CB state. However, in the challenge mode, since the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not notified when the push order replay is won, it is rare to shift to the 2nd RT state and the 3rd RT state, which corresponds to almost the normal gaming state or the 1st RT state. Will be done. In the challenge mode, when the game state at that time is the normal game state or the first RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals is reduced by about 1.59 for each game played, and the game state at that time is the second RT state or the first RT state. In the third RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals will decrease by about 0.06 for each game played.

The attack mode is a display mode in which the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified in both the push order bell winning and the push order replay winning. The attack mode is composed of four attack modes, the first attack mode to the fourth attack mode, which have different transition probabilities to the VB mode. In any of the attack modes, the VB mode is set as compared with the normal mode. The transition probability of is high. Transition to VB mode If you win the lottery, you will transition from attack mode to VB mode. Transition to VB mode If the game is played a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) without winning the lottery, the attack mode is shifted to the normal mode.

The first attack mode to the fourth attack mode are set so that the probability of winning the transition lottery to the VB mode is different. More specifically, the probability of winning the lottery for transition to VB mode is set so that the fourth attack mode has the highest probability and the first attack mode has the lowest probability, and the first attack mode and the second attack mode are set. , The third attack mode, and the fourth attack mode are set so that the probability of winning the transition lottery to the VB mode increases in this order.

The attack mode corresponds to each gaming state of the normal gaming state, the first RT state, the second RT state, the third RT state, and the CB state. However, in the attack mode, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified both when the push order bell is won and when the push order replay is won. Therefore, the stop switch 42 is notified in the operation order notified by the player. When ~ 44 is operated, it almost corresponds to the second RT state. In the attack mode, when the gaming state at that time is the normal gaming state or the first RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals increases by about 0.61 for each game played, and the gaming state at that time is the second RT state or the first RT state. In the third RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals will increase by about 1.90 for each game played. Since the attack mode continues for at least 50 games after the game state shifts to the second RT state, the player can expect an increase of about 100 medals when the game state shifts to the attack mode.

Similar to the attack mode, the VB mode is a display mode in which the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified in both the push order bell winning and the pushing order replay winning. The difference between VB mode and attack mode is that when the second promotion replay 1 or the second promotion replay 2 is won, the operation order for establishing the first replay prize is notified in the attack mode. , In the VB mode, the operation order for establishing the 4th replay winning or the 5th replay winning is notified (see FIG. 23 (b)).

The VB mode corresponds to each gaming state of the normal gaming state, the first RT state, the second RT state, the third RT state, and the CB state. However, in the VB mode, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified both when the push order bell is won and when the push order replay is won, and the second promotion replay 1 or the second promotion replay 2 is won. In that case, the operation order for establishing the 4th re-game prize or the 5th re-game prize is notified. Therefore, the VB mode substantially corresponds to the third RT state when the player operates the stop switches 42 to 44 in the notified operation order. In the VB mode, when the gaming state at that time is the normal gaming state or the first RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals increases by about 0.61 for each game played, and the gaming state at that time is the second RT state or the first RT state. In the third RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals will increase by about 1.90 for each game played. Since the VB mode continues for at least 25 games after the game state shifts to the third RT state, the player can expect an increase of about 50 medals when the game state shifts to the VB mode.

Explaining the transition of the display mode when the number of medals owned by the player increases, the general flow is to shift from the normal mode to the challenge mode, shift from the challenge mode to the attack mode, and then return from the attack mode to the normal mode. .. And since the lottery to shift to VB mode is performed in the attack mode, if a loop occurs in which the attack mode shifts to the VB mode and the VB mode returns to the attack mode, the player expects more medals to be owned. can.

As described above, when comparing the normal mode and the challenge mode, the probability of winning the lottery for transition to the attack mode is set to be higher in the challenge mode than in the normal mode. Therefore, the challenge mode is also called a so-called chance zone that is expected to shift to the attack mode.

Further, the first attack mode to the fourth attack mode are set in the attack mode, and the winning probability of the transition lottery to the VB mode is different in each attack mode. Then, when shifting from the normal mode or the challenge mode to the attack mode, it basically shifts to the first attack mode. In the first attack mode, a lottery for shifting to the VB mode is performed, and a lottery for shifting to the second attack mode is performed. If the lottery for shifting to the second attack mode is won, the game shifts to the second attack mode and the winning probability of the lottery for shifting to the VB mode increases. In the second attack mode, a lottery for shifting to the VB mode is performed, and a lottery for shifting to the third attack mode is performed. If the lottery for shifting to the third attack mode is won, the game shifts to the third attack mode and the winning probability of the lottery for shifting to the VB mode increases. Then, in the third attack mode, a lottery for shifting to the VB mode is performed, and a lottery for shifting to the fourth attack mode is performed. If you win the lottery for shifting to the 4th attack mode, you will shift to the 4th attack mode and the winning probability of the lottery for shifting to the VB mode will increase.

Therefore, when shifting to the attack mode, the promotion to the first attack mode → the second attack mode → the third attack mode → the fourth attack mode and the attack mode is performed, so that the transition probability to the VB mode becomes high and the attack A loop between the mode and the VB mode is likely to occur.

As described above, in the slot machine 10, the player has a configuration in which the number of medals owned by the player is increased in each display mode of the attack mode, the VBB mode, and the BB mode. Then, in conjunction with each display mode, a plurality of RT states and a plurality of states such as a BB state and a CB state are configured to go back and forth by winning a prize in each replay or stopping a transitional outcome. As described above, depending on the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 43 when the push order replay is won or when the push order bell is won, the corresponding re-game winning prize is established or the transition roll is stopped. Further, in the attack mode and the VB mode, when the push order bell is won, the operation order in which the first small winning combination can be established is notified, so that the number of owned medals can be expected to increase.

Hereinafter, the configuration related to the display mode will be described.

The configuration related to the display mode is roughly divided into (1) processing related to the transition lottery of the display mode, (2) processing for shifting the gaming state based on the result of the transition lottery of the display mode, and (3) based on the winning result. There is a process for shifting the display mode, and (4) a process related to the notification effect on the sub side. Hereinafter, they will be described in order.

<Processing related to display mode transition lottery>
<Processing for lottery results>
The process related to the shift lottery of the display mode (1) is performed in the lottery result correspondence process (step S310) of the lottery process (FIG. 16) by the main control device 101. Therefore, the lottery result handling process will be described below with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 31.

In step S701, as a result of this lottery, strong cherry, weak cherry, watermelon, chance A, B and middle bell, strong cherry duplication 1, 2, weak cherry duplication 1, 2, watermelon duplication 1, 2, chance A duplication 1 , 2, Chance B overlap 1, 2, Middle bell overlap 1, 2, (For example, see FIG. 17, IV = 13-18, 31-42, hereinafter, these roles are collectively referred to as "specific role"). Judge whether or not. When the lottery result is a specific combination, the process for shifting the display mode based on the specific combination in steps S702 to S708 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S701 that the specific winning combination is not won, processing for shifting to the display mode or the like is performed in steps S709 to S712.

Specifically, when it is determined in step S701 that the specific combination has been won, it is determined in step S702 whether or not the current gaming state is the normal gaming state or the first RT state. If an affirmative determination is made in step S702, it is determined in step S703 whether or not the attack mode winning flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106. The attack mode winning flag is a flag that is set when the attack mode transition lottery is won and is cleared when shifting to the attack mode. If a negative determination is made in step S703, the first specific combination process is executed in step S704.

<First specific combination processing>
The first specific combination processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

Here, the case where the first specific combination processing is performed is a state in which the game is in the normal game state or the first RT state, and the attack mode is not won. In this case, the display mode corresponds to the normal mode or the challenge mode. In the first specific combination process, a transition lottery for whether or not to shift the display mode to the challenge mode is performed, and a transition lottery for whether or not to shift to the attack mode is performed. Further, in the first specific combination processing, if the current display mode is the challenge mode, the processing for adding the number of continuous games in the challenge mode is performed.

That is, in step S801, it is determined whether or not the current display mode is in the challenge mode. When not in the challenge mode, it means that the current display mode is the normal mode. If a negative determination is made in step S801, a normal time table is acquired from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105 as a table for the attack mode lottery in step S802. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S801, a chance mode table is acquired from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105 as an attack mode lottery table in step S803. In the normal time table and the chance mode table, the transition probabilities to the attack mode are set according to the type of the specific combination. For example, among strong cherries and weak cherries, the strong cherries are set to have a higher probability of shifting to the attack mode than the weak cherries. In addition, the probability of transition to the attack mode is different between the normal time table and the chance mode table as a whole, and the chance mode table has a higher transition probability to the attack mode than the normal time table. Is set to.

After acquiring the table for the attack mode transition lottery in step S802 or step S803, the attack mode lottery process is executed in step S804. In such a process, a lottery counter is acquired from various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 and compared with the lottery table acquired in step S802 or step S803 to perform a lottery for shifting to the attack mode.

In step S805, it is determined whether or not the lottery for shifting to the attack mode has been won based on the processing result of step S804. If the lottery for transition to the attack mode is won, the process of setting the attack mode winning flag is performed in step S806.

In the following step S807, it is determined whether or not the bonus winning flag is set. If a negative determination is made in step S807, a lottery process for the number of precursor games is performed in step S808. Here, in the present embodiment, when the transition lottery to the challenge mode, the attack mode, or the VB mode is won as the transition lottery of the display mode, the notification that the transition lottery has been won is notified after passing through the precursor mode. Will be done. Therefore, the game that won the transition lottery may differ from the game that is notified that the transition lottery has been won. , Set as precursor mode.

As the number of precursor games, 1 game to 32 games are set, and in step S808, one of these 1 to 32 is randomly determined by lottery. It should be noted that the number of precursor games to be selected may be set to be different depending on the specific combination that triggered the winning of the attack mode and the game state. This also applies to the lottery process for the number of other precursor games.

In step S809, based on the processing result of step S808, a process of inputting the number of precursor games to the precursor counters provided in various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 is performed. The precursor counter is a counter that is decremented by 1 for each game, and when the precursor counter becomes 0, it is notified that the precursor mode has ended and the transition lottery has been won.

In step S810, a process of setting a precursor command as an output target to the sub-control device 81 is executed. The precursor command includes information on the lottery result (display mode that shifts after the precursor mode, attack mode in the case of step S810) and the number of precursor games that triggered the precursor mode. The processing on the sub-control device 81 side based on the reception of the precursor command will be described in detail later. After executing the process of step S810, the first specific combination process is terminated.

If the bonus winning flag is set in step S807, the first specific combination processing is terminated as it is without setting the number of precursor games. When the bonus winning flag is set, it means that a specific role is won in the carry-over state of the 1st BB or the 2nd BB, and the attack mode transition lottery is won, or a role that overlaps with the bonus (strong cherry duplication 1,). This is the case when the attack mode transition lottery is won in 2nd grade). In this case, the BB mode has priority over the attack mode as the transition destination of the display mode.

If it is determined in step S805 that the lottery for shifting to the attack mode has not been won, the process proceeds to step S811. In step S811, the challenge mode lottery process is executed. In the challenge mode lottery process, the table for the challenge mode lottery is acquired from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105, and the counters for the lottery are acquired from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. In the table for the challenge mode lottery, the transition probability to the challenge mode is set according to the type of the specific combination. For example, among strong cherries and weak cherries, the strong cherries are set to have a higher probability of transition to the challenge mode than the weak cherries.

The case where step S811 is executed includes the case where the display mode is the challenge mode. In this case as well, the challenge mode lottery process is executed in step S811, and the table for the lottery is common to the normal mode and the challenge mode. It is a table of. As in steps S801 to 803, the lottery table may be different depending on whether or not the challenge mode is in progress.

In step S812, it is determined whether or not the challenge mode has been won based on the processing result of step S811. If it is determined that the challenge mode has been won, it is determined in step S813 whether or not the current display mode is the challenge mode. When the mode is not the challenge mode but the normal mode, the process of setting the challenge mode winning flag in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106 is executed in step S814.

In the following step S815, it is determined whether or not the bonus winning flag is set, and if it is set, the first specific combination processing is terminated as it is. If it is not set, the lottery process for the number of precursor games is executed in step S816, the process for setting the number of precursor games in the precursor counter is executed in step S817, and the process for setting the precursor command is executed in step S818. After that, the first specific combination processing is terminated. The processes of steps S815 to S818 correspond to steps S807 to S810.

If it is determined in step S813 that the challenge mode has been won again during the challenge mode, the process for adding the continuous game in the challenge mode is performed in steps S819 to S823. That is, in step S819, it is determined whether or not the bonus winning flag is set. If the bonus winning flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S820, and the lottery process for the number of additional games in the challenge mode is executed.

Here, the addition means adding the number of continuous games in the challenge mode and the attack mode, and the number of additional games corresponds to the value to be added to the number of continuous games. In step S820, a value to be added to the number of continuous games in the challenge mode is determined by lottery.

Specifically, in the lottery process for the number of additional games, the table for the number of additional games in the challenge mode is acquired from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105, and the counters for the lottery are acquired from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. The table for the number of additional games in the challenge mode is set so that the number of additional games increases according to the type of the specific combination. For example, with a strong cherry, there is an 80% chance of adding 30 games in challenge mode, and a 20% chance of adding 50 games. For weak cherries, there is an 80% chance of adding 5 games, and a 20% chance of adding 20 games.

In step S821, the number of games in the challenge mode is added. In such processing, a value corresponding to the number of additional games drawn by step S820 is added to the counter (more specifically, the challenge mode continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106) that manages the number of continuous games in the challenge mode. Performs the process of adding. Then, in step S822, the process of setting the additional command as the output target to the sub control device 81 is performed, and then the first specific combination process is terminated. The addition command includes information that the addition has occurred, the number of additional games, and the target (challenge mode or attack mode) to be added. The processing on the sub-control device 81 side that received the addition command will be described in detail later, but the sub-control device 81 adds the information included in these addition commands as notification based on the reception of the addition command. Notify (additional production).

If the bonus winning flag is set in step S819, the process proceeds to step S823. In step S823, the challenge mode addition flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106, and then the first specific combination processing is terminated. The challenge mode addition flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the addition condition for the number of games in the challenge mode is satisfied. Details will be described later, but if the bonus ends when the challenge mode addition flag is set, the challenge mode addition is performed at the end of the bonus.

Returning to the description of the lottery result correspondence process (FIG. 31), if a negative determination is made in step S702 or an affirmative determination is made in step S703, the process proceeds to step S705. In step S705, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the second RT state. In the second RT state, in step S706, it is determined whether or not the VB mode winning flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106. The VB mode winning flag is a flag that is set when the VB mode transition lottery is won and is cleared when the transition to the VB mode is performed. If a negative determination is made in step S706, the second specific combination process is executed in step S707. If a negative determination is made in step S705 or an affirmative determination is made in step S706, the third specific combination process is executed in step S708.

<Second specific combination processing>
The second specific combination processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 33.

Here, the case where the second specific combination processing is performed is a state in which the second RT state is set and the VB mode is not won. The attack mode corresponds to the display mode in this case. In the second specific combination processing, a transition lottery for whether or not to shift the display mode to the VB mode is performed. Further, in the second specific combination processing, the rank promotion lottery of the attack mode is performed, and the processing for adding the number of continuous games in the attack mode is performed.

That is, in step S901, a process of grasping the rank of the attack mode is performed. As described above, in the present embodiment, four attack mode ranks of the first attack mode to the fourth attack mode are provided, and the transition probability to the VB mode is different for each rank. Therefore, step S901 determines which of the first attack mode to the fourth attack mode is the rank of the current attack mode.

In step S902, the VB mode lottery table corresponding to the rank of the attack mode grasped in step S901 is acquired from various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105. In the VB mode lottery table, the transition probabilities to the VB mode are set according to the type of the specific combination. For example, among strong cherries and weak cherries, the strong cherries are set to have a higher probability of transition to the VB mode than the weak cherries. Further, in the VB mode lottery table of each rank, the transition probability to the VB mode is different as a whole, and the transition probability to the VB mode is higher in the second attack mode than in the first attack mode. As described above, the 4th attack mode has a higher probability of shifting to the VB mode than the 3rd attack mode so that the 3rd attack mode has a higher probability of shifting to the VB mode than the 2nd attack mode. It is set so that the transition probability of is high.

In step S903, the VB mode transition lottery is performed using the table acquired in step S902 and the lottery counters acquired from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. Then, in step S904, it is determined whether or not the lottery result in step S903 corresponds to the VB mode winning.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S904, a process of setting the VB mode winning flag in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106 is performed in step S905. After that, in steps S906 to S909, the process for setting the number of precursor games is performed in the same manner as in steps S807 to S810. That is, in step S906, it is determined whether or not the bonus winning flag is set, and if it is set, the second specific combination processing is terminated as it is. If it is not set, the lottery process for the number of precursor games is executed in step S907, the process for setting the number of precursor games in the precursor counter is executed in step S908, and the process for setting the precursor command is executed in step S909. After that, the second specific combination processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step S904 that the result of the VB mode lottery process is not VB mode winning, the process proceeds to step S910. Steps S910 to S913 are processes for promoting the rank of the attack mode.

In step S910, the attack mode promotion lottery process is performed. In such a process, a table for promotion lottery is acquired from various table storage areas 105a of ROM 105, and counters for lottery are acquired from various counter areas 106e of RAM 106. A plurality of tables for promotion lottery are provided according to the rank of the attack mode, specifically, a table for the first attack mode, a table for the second attack mode, and a table for the third attack mode. There are three (promotion lottery is not performed when staying in the 4th attack mode). In each table, the winning probability of the promotion lottery is set according to the type of the specific combination. For example, among strong cherries and weak cherries, the strong cherries are set to have a higher probability of winning the promotion lottery than the weak cherries. Further, in each attack mode table, the promotion probability of the second attack mode table is lower than that of the first attack mode table, so that the third attack mode table has a lower promotion probability than the second attack mode table. The table for attack mode is set so that the promotion probability is lower, and it is set so that it becomes difficult to be promoted to the next rank as the rank of attack mode is promoted.

In step S911, it is determined whether or not the lottery result in step S910 is a promotion winning. If the promotion is won, the attack mode promotion process is performed in step S912. In such a process, the rank flag provided in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106 is rewritten from the rank flag corresponding to the rank of the current attack mode to the rank flag one higher than the rank flag. After that, in step S913, a process of setting the promotion command as an output target to the sub control device 81 is performed. The promotion command contains information on the attack mode of the promotion destination. The sub control device 81 that has received the promotion command controls the display control device 201 and the sound source IC so as to perform an effect for the attack mode of the rank of the promotion destination. As an effect for the attack mode in the liquid crystal display device 65, for example, an effect of a different background color is set according to the rank of the attack mode, and in the sub control device 81, when the promotion command is received, the attack mode is set. The display control device 201 is controlled so as to notify that the rank has been promoted and to produce an effect for the attack mode with a background color corresponding to the rank of the promotion destination.

If it is determined in step S911 that the promotion lottery has not been won, or after the process of step S913 is executed, the process for adding the number of continuous games in the attack mode is performed in steps S915 to S920.

That is, in step S914, the lottery process for adding the number of games in the attack mode is performed. In the additional lottery process, the attack mode additional lottery table is acquired from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105, and the lottery counters are acquired from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. The attack mode additional lottery table is set so that the probability of winning the additional lottery differs depending on the type of the specific combination. For example, a strong cherry has an 80% chance of winning an additional lottery, and a weak cherry has a 20% chance of winning an additional lottery. The winning probability may be different depending on the rank of the attack mode. Then, in step S915, it is determined whether or not the additional lottery has been won. If it is determined that the additional lottery has not been won, the second specific combination processing is terminated as it is.

If it is determined that the additional lottery has been won, it is determined in step S916 whether or not the bonus winning flag is set. If the bonus winning flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S917, and the lottery process for the number of additional games in the attack mode is performed. In the lottery process for the number of additional games, the table for the number of additional games in the attack mode is acquired from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105, and the counters for the lottery are acquired from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. The table for the number of additional games in the attack mode is set so that the number of additional games differs according to the type of the specific combination. For example, with a strong cherry, there is a 90% chance of adding 20 games in attack mode, and a 10% chance of adding 80 games. For weak cherries, there is a 95% chance of adding 5 games, and a 5% chance of adding 100 games.

In step S918, the number of games in the attack mode is added. In such processing, a value corresponding to the number of additional games drawn by step S917 is added to a counter (more specifically, an attack mode continuation counter provided in various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106) that manages the number of continuous games in the attack mode. Performs the process of adding. Then, in step S919, the process of setting the additional command as the output target to the sub control device 81 is performed, and then the second specific combination process is terminated.

If the bonus winning flag is set in step S916, the process proceeds to step S920. In step S920, the attack mode addition flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106, and then the second specific combination processing is terminated. The attack mode addition flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the addition condition for the number of games in the attack mode is satisfied. Details will be described later, but if the bonus ends when the attack mode addition flag is set, the attack mode addition is performed at the end of the bonus.

<Third specific role processing>
Next, the third specific combination processing executed in step S708 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 34.

The case where the third specific combination processing is performed is a case where the third RT state is set, or a state where the second RT state is set and the VB mode is won. The display mode in this case corresponds to the attack mode or the VB mode. In the third specific combination process, a process for adding the number of continuous games in the attack mode is performed.

That is, in step S1001, the lottery process for adding the number of games in the attack mode is performed. Such processing is the same as the processing in step S914. The winning probability of the additional lottery may be different between the lottery process of step S914 and the lottery process of step S1001.

In step S1002, it is determined whether or not the lottery result in step S1001 is an additional winning result. If it is determined that the additional lottery has been won, it is determined in step S1003 whether or not the bonus winning flag is set. If the bonus winning flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S1004, and the lottery process for the number of additional games in the attack mode is performed. Then, in step S1005, the number of games in the attack mode is added, and in step S1006, the added command is set as an output target to the sub control device 81, and then the third specific combination process is terminated. The processing of steps S1003 to S1006 is the same as the processing of steps S916 to S919. The number of additional games may be different between the lottery process of step S916 and the lottery process of step S1004.

If a negative determination is made in step S1002, the third specific combination processing is terminated as it is. If it is determined in step S1003 that the bonus winning flag is set, the attack mode addition flag is set in step S1007, and then the third specific combination process is terminated. The attack mode addition flag is as described above.

Returning to the explanation of the lottery result correspondence process (FIG. 31), if it is determined in step S701 that the result of this lottery process is not a specific winning combination, the result of this lottery process is pushed in step S709. It is determined whether or not the order replay or the push order bell (hereinafter collectively referred to as "push order role") has been won. If the push order combination is won, the push order combination process is executed in step S710. The push order combination processing will be described in detail later.

After executing any of the processes of step S704, step S707, step S708 and step S710, or after making a negative determination in step S709, the process proceeds to step S711. In step S711, it is determined whether or not the special zone flag corresponding to the additional special zone is set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106. The special zone flag is a flag set based on the establishment of the 7th re-game prize, and the additional special zone is a high addition of the number of continuous games in the attack zone over multiple games. Shows the state that occurs with probability. If the special zone flag is set in step S711, the special zone process is executed in step S712. The special zone flag, the special zone, and the special zone processing will be described in detail later. If a negative determination is made in step S711, or after the process of step S712 is executed, the process for dealing with the lottery result is terminated.

As described above, when it is determined that a specific winning combination has been won in the lottery result handling process, a process for shifting to a challenge mode, an attack mode or a VB mode, and a process for adding the number of continuous games in the challenge mode or the attack mode. And so on. If the lottery for transition to the challenge mode, attack mode, or VB mode is won, the notification of winning the transition lottery is given after the precursory game. Therefore, the process for shifting the gaming state based on the result of the display mode transition lottery will be described below.

<Process for shifting the game state based on the result of the display mode transition lottery>
(2) In the process for shifting the gaming state based on the result of the display mode transition lottery, the process for notifying that the display mode transition lottery has been won and the notification for shifting the gaming state are performed. And the processing to do is done. Therefore, first, the process related to the notification that the transition lottery has been won will be described.

<Process for mode transition notification>
The notification that the transition lottery has been won is performed in the mode transition notification processing (step S206) in the normal processing (FIG. 15). The mode transition notification process is a process executed when a predetermined bet operation is performed (when it is determined that the number of bets in step S205 is a predetermined number). Hereinafter, the mode transition notification process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 35.

In step S1101, it is determined whether or not the number of precursor games is 0. The number of precursor games is counted in the winning result correspondence process described later, and the number of precursor games is decremented by 1 each time one game is exhausted. If the number of precursor games is not 0, the mode transition notification process is terminated as it is.

When the number of precursor games is 0, it is determined in step S1102 whether or not the challenge mode winning flag is set. That is, it is determined whether or not the precursor mode this time is the precursor mode triggered by the winning of the challenge mode. If the challenge mode winning flag is set, the challenge mode winning flag is cleared in step S1103. Then, in step S1104, the challenge mode flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106. The challenge mode flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the current display mode is the challenge mode. In step S1105, the challenge mode start command is set as an output target to the sub control device 81. The sub-control device 81 that has received the challenge mode start command notifies that the challenge mode is started by the liquid crystal display device 65 or the like. Such notification will be described in detail later.

After that, in step S1106, counting of the number of continuous challenge modes is started. Specifically, the initial value (for example, 10) of the number of continuous games in the challenge mode is set in the challenge mode continuation counter provided in various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. After performing the process of step S1106, the process for notifying the transition to this mode is terminated.

When it is determined in step S1102 that the challenge mode winning flag is not set, it is determined in step S1107 whether or not the attack mode winning flag is set. That is, it is determined whether or not the precursor mode this time is the precursor mode triggered by the winning of the attack mode. If the attack mode winning flag is set, the attack mode winning flag is cleared in step S1108. Then, in step S1109, the attack notification flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106. The attack notification flag is a flag for shifting the gaming state to the second RT state when the attack mode transition lottery is won. After that, in step S1110, the attack mode winning notification command is set as an output target to the sub control device 81. The sub-control device 81 that has received the attack mode winning notification command notifies that the attack mode transition lottery has been won by the liquid crystal display device 65 or the like. Such notification will be described in detail later. After executing the process of step S1110, the process for notifying the transition to this mode is terminated.

When it is determined in step S1107 that the attack mode winning flag is not set, it is determined in step S1111 whether or not the VB mode winning flag is set. That is, it is determined whether or not the precursor mode this time is the precursor mode triggered by the winning of the VB mode. If the attack mode winning flag is set, the VB mode winning flag is cleared in step S1112. Then, in step S1113, the VB notification flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106. The VB notification flag is a flag for shifting the gaming state to the third RT state when the VB mode transition lottery is won. After that, in step S1114, the VB mode winning notification command is set as an output target to the sub control device 81. The sub-control device 81 that has received the VB mode winning notification command notifies that the VB mode transition lottery has been won by the liquid crystal display device 65 or the like. Such notification will be described in detail later. After executing the process of step S1114, the process for notifying the transition to this mode is terminated. If it is determined in step S1111 that the VB mode winning flag is not set, the mode transition notification process is terminated as it is.

That is, of the challenge mode, the attack mode, and the VB mode that shifts through the precursor mode, the challenge mode is started based on the bet operation when the number of precursor games in the precursor mode becomes 0. On the other hand, in the attack mode and VB mode, only the notification that the attack mode transition lottery or the VB mode transition lottery has been won is performed based on the bet operation when the number of precursor games in the precursor mode becomes 0, which is a precursor. Even if the number of games becomes 0, the attack mode and VB mode are not started. This is because the challenge mode as the display mode does not involve the transition of the gaming state, while the attack mode and the VB mode accompany the transition of the gaming state, and specifically, the attack mode shifts to the second RT state. It is started and the VB mode is due to the difference that it is started by shifting to the 3rd RT state.

As already explained, the 2nd RT state is the case where the 1st promotion replays 1 to 4 are won, the 3rd replay winning is established, and the 3rd RT state is the 2nd promotion replays 1 and 2. If the player wins the prize, the game shifts to the case where the 4th and 5th replay prizes are established. Then, when the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won and the third replay prize is established, or when the second promotion replays 1 and 2 are won and the fourth and fifth replay prizes are established, This is the case where the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 at the time of winning the promotion replay corresponds to the third replay winning or the like. Therefore, when the lottery for shifting to the attack mode or the VB mode is won, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified in the game in which the winning combination is to shift the gaming state thereafter. It is configured to enable the transition of the game state. It should be noted that from the notification that the attack mode or VB mode transition lottery has been won to the start of the attack mode or VB mode (until the game state shifts), the notification as a preparation state (for example, "" "Preparing" will be announced.

<Explanation about transition of display mode>
The notification process for shifting the game state is performed in the push order combination process (step S710) in the lottery result correspondence process (FIG. 31). Here, prior to the description of the push order combination processing, an outline of the case where the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified will be described with reference to FIG. 36.

<Overview of push order notification effect>
Notification of the operation order at the time of winning the push order combination (push order notification effect) is mainly performed by the liquid crystal display device 65 and the push order notification unit 68. Here, a case where the push order combination in the case where the operation order to be notified this time is middle → right → left is won will be described as an example.

As shown in FIG. 36 (a), in the liquid crystal display device 65, among the three parallel button displays corresponding to the stop switches 42 to 44, the button display corresponding to the stop switch to be operated first (middle stop in the figure). The number 1 is added to the middle button display corresponding to the switch 43), and the display is larger than the other button displays. In addition, each button display is displayed in a color corresponding to the winning combination (yellow for a bell, blue for a replay, etc.). As a result, the player can recognize the winning combination in this game and the stop switch to be operated first is the middle stop switch 43. Further, in the liquid crystal display device 65, a numerical value is displayed on the right button display so as to indicate that the stop switch to be operated next is the right stop switch 44 and the last stop switch to be operated is the left stop switch 42. 2 is attached and displayed, and the number 3 is attached to the left button display.

In the push order notification unit 68, among the three LED lamps 68a, 68b, 68c provided side by side corresponding to the stop switches 42 to 44, the middle LED lamp 68b is lit, and the left and right LED 68a, 68c lamps are lit. Turns off. As a result, the player can recognize that the stop switch to be operated first in this game is the middle stop switch 43. The push order notification unit 68 may also be configured to notify the winning combination together with the push order by changing the color of the LED lamp to be turned on. Further, the lighting color of the LED lamp corresponding to the second and subsequent operations may be changed or blinked so that the stop switch to be operated after the second can be recognized.

When the player operates the middle stop switch 43, as shown in FIG. 36B, in the liquid crystal display device 65, the middle button display corresponding to the middle stop switch 43 disappears, and the right button corresponding to the right stop switch 44 disappears. The button display is displayed large. As a result, the player can confirm that the operation of the middle stop switch 43 is completed and that the stop switch to be operated next is the right stop switch 44.

In the push order notification unit 68, the LED lamp 68b in the middle is turned off and the LED lamp 68c on the right is turned on (the LED lamp 68a on the left remains turned off). As a result, the player can recognize that the operation of the middle stop switch 43 has been completed and that the stop switch to be operated next is the right stop switch 44.

When the player operates the right stop switch 44, as shown in FIG. 36C, in the liquid crystal display device 65, the right button display corresponding to the right stop switch 44 disappears, and the left button corresponding to the left stop switch 42 disappears. The button display is displayed large. As a result, the player can confirm that the operation of the right stop switch 44 is completed and that the stop switch to be operated next is the left stop switch 42.

In the push order notification unit 68, the right LED lamp 68c is turned off and the left LED lamp 68a is turned on (the middle LED lamp 68b remains off). As a result, the player can recognize that the operation of the right stop switch 44 is completed and that the stop switch to be operated next is the left stop switch 42.

Explaining the execution timing of the push order notification effect, the push order is during the invalid period of the stop switches 42 to 44 from the start of rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R to the constant speed rotation through the acceleration period. The notification effect is set to be executed. In this way, by configuring the push order notification effect to be executed at a timing before the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 becomes effective, the stop switches 42 to 42 are recognized after recognizing the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44. It is possible to make the operation of 44 desired, and the game can be advanced at a good tempo.

<Pushing order processing>
Next, the push order combination process executed in step S710 in the lottery result correspondence process (FIG. 31) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 37.

In step S1201, it is determined whether or not the lottery result this time is any of the first promotion replays 1 to 4. The case where the affirmative determination is made in step S1201 is the case where the first re-game or the third re-game wins a prize depending on the operation order of the current game. In this case, the process proceeds to step S1202, and it is determined whether or not the attack notification flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106. As described above, the attack notification flag is a flag set when the number of precursor games in the precursor mode becomes 0 after winning the transition lottery to the attack mode in the mode transition notification process (FIG. 35). be.

If the attack notification flag is set, the process for notification of the push order of the third re-game is executed in step S1203. Specifically, among the first re-game and the third re-game, the operation order corresponding to the third re-game winning is notified (see FIG. 23 (a)). After that, in step S1204, a process of setting the push order notification command as an output target to the sub control device 81 is performed, and then the main push order combination process is terminated. The push order notification command includes information on the current display mode and information on the lottery result. The processing on the sub-control device 81 side based on the reception of the push order notification command will be described in detail later.

In addition, in the case of notifying the operation order corresponding to the third re-game winning in step S1203, basically, the lottery for shifting to the attack mode is won, and the winning notification of the attack mode is performed via the precursor mode. It is assumed that it is after the damage and before the transition to the attack mode. That is, the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are not won in the lottery table in the second RT state or the third RT state, and the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won only in the first RT state. However, even after the transition to the attack mode, the game state may fall from the 2nd RT state to the 1st RT state, and even in such a case, the 1st promotion replays 1 to 4 are won. By doing so, it is possible to return to the second RT state at an early stage.

If a negative determination is made in step S1201, it is determined in step S1205 whether or not the lottery result this time is any of the fall replays 1 to 3. The case where the affirmative determination is made in step S1205 is the case where the first re-game or the second re-game wins a prize depending on the operation order of the current game. In this case, in step S1206, it is determined whether or not the attack notification flag is set. If the attack notification flag is set, the process for notification of the push order of the first re-game is executed in step S1207. Specifically, among the first re-game and the second re-game, the operation order corresponding to the first re-game winning is notified (see FIG. 23 (b)). After that, in step S1208, the process of setting the push order notification command is performed, and then the final push order combination process is terminated.

In this way, if the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won in the situation where the lottery for transition to the attack mode is won, the operation order corresponding to the third re-game winning is notified, and the game state is changed. It is possible to shift to the 2RT state. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1202, the push order combination process is terminated as it is without performing the push order notification process. Therefore, for example, in the first RT state, even if the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won without winning the attack mode, the first re-game prize is established and the third re-game prize is established. , There is.

In addition, when the fall replays 1 to 3 are won in the situation where the attack notification flag is set, the operation order corresponding to the first re-game winning is notified, and the game state is shifted to the first RT state. It is possible to prevent it from happening. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1206, the push order combination process is terminated as it is without performing the push order notification process. Therefore, for example, when the attack mode ends, the attack notification flag is cleared, and the display mode shifts to the normal mode, the second replay prize may be established by winning the fall replays 1 to 3, and the RT state. Will shift from the 2nd RT state to the 1st RT state.

Further, for example, in the 1st RT state, the 1st promotion replays 1 to 4 are won without winning the attack mode, and the operation order happens to correspond to the 3rd replay winning, and the 3rd replay winning is established. Even if it is done (even if it shifts to the 2nd RT state), the 2nd replay winning can be established by winning the fall replays 1 to 3. Therefore, as described above, even if it happens to shift to the second RT state without winning the attack mode, it will promptly shift to the first RT state thereafter.

If a negative determination is made in step S1205, it is determined in step S1209 whether or not the lottery result this time is one of the second promotion replays 1 and 2. The case where the affirmative determination is made in step S1209 is the case where the first re-game, the fourth re-game, or the fifth re-game wins a prize depending on the operation order of the current game. In this case, in step S1210, it is determined whether or not the attack notification flag is set. When the attack notification flag is set, in step S1211, it is determined whether or not the VB notification flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106. As described above, the VB notification flag is a flag set when the number of precursor games in the precursor mode becomes 0 after winning the transition lottery to the VB mode in the mode transition notification process (FIG. 35). be.

When the VB notification flag is set, the process for notification of the push order of the fourth re-game or the fifth re-game is executed in step S1212. Specifically, among the first re-game, the fourth re-game, and the fifth re-game, the operation order corresponding to the fourth re-game prize or the fifth re-game prize is notified (see FIG. 23 (b)). After that, in step S1213, the process of setting the push order notification command is performed, and then the final push order combination process is terminated.

If a negative determination is made in step S1210, the push order combination process is terminated as it is without performing the push order notification process. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1211, the process for notifying the push order of the first replay is executed in step S1207, and the process for setting the push order notification command is performed in step S1208. The final push order processing is completed. Therefore, when the second promotion replays 1 and 2 are won without winning the VB mode, the push order notification effect corresponding to the first replay winning is performed if the attack mode is in effect, and the player must be in the attack mode. If there is no push order notification effect.

If a negative determination is made in step S1209, it is determined in step S1214 whether or not the lottery result this time is one of BAR replays 1 and 2. The case where the affirmative determination is made in step S1214 is a case where any one of the first re-game, the third re-game, and the sixth re-game to the eighth re-game wins, depending on the operation order of the current game. In this case, in step S1215, it is determined whether or not the attack notification flag is set. When the attack notification flag is set, it is determined in step S1216 whether or not the VB notification flag is set. When the attack notification flag is set and the VB notification flag is set, in step S1217, the process for notifying the push order of the sixth re-game to the eighth re-game is executed. Specifically, among the 1st re-game, the 3rd re-game, and the 6th re-game to the 8th re-game, the operation order corresponding to the 6th re-game winning to the 8th re-game winning is notified (FIG. 23 (FIG. 23). c) See). After that, in step S1218, the process of setting the push order notification command is performed, and then the final push order combination process is terminated.

If a negative determination is made in step S1215, the push order combination process is terminated as it is without performing the push order notification process. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1216, the process for notifying the push order of the first replay is executed in step S1207, and the process for setting the push order notification command is performed in step S1208. The final push order processing is completed. Therefore, when the BAR replays 1 and 2 are won without winning the VB mode, the push order notification effect corresponding to the first replay winning is performed if the attack mode is in effect, and the push order is performed if the attack mode is not in progress. No forward notification effect is performed.

If a negative determination is made in step S1214, it is determined in step S1219 whether or not the lottery result this time is a push order bell winning. If the push order bell is won, in step S1220, it is determined whether or not the current display mode is in the normal mode or the challenge mode. When the mode is not the normal mode or the challenge mode, a process for notifying the push order for notifying the operation order corresponding to the first small winning combination is executed in step S1221 (see FIG. 19). After that, in step S1222, the process of setting the push order notification command is performed, and then the final push order combination process is terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S1219 or an affirmative determination is made in step S1220, the main push order combination processing is terminated as it is without performing the push order notification process.

<Process to shift the display mode based on the winning result>
<Processing for winning results>
Next, a process will be described when a winning combination corresponding to the transition of the gaming state is awarded as a result of the notification for shifting the gaming state as described above (3). This process is performed in the winning result corresponding process (step S411) in the reel control process (FIG. 18). Hereinafter, the winning result handling process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 38.

In step S1301, the game number management process is executed. Although the details will be described later, in this game number management process, in addition to counting the number of precursor games in the precursor mode described above, the number of continuous games in the challenge mode, attack mode, VB mode, and special zone is counted.

In the following step S1302, it is determined whether or not the third re-game winning is established based on the stop result this time. As described above, when the third re-game winning is established, the RT state process (FIG. 21) performs a process for shifting the game state to the second RT state. In this case, in step S1303, it is determined whether or not the attack notification flag is set. When the attack notification flag is set, in step S1304, it is determined whether or not the current display mode is in the attack mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the attack mode flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d. The attack mode flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to specify that the display mode is the attack mode. Incidentally, as the flag for specifying the display mode, in addition to the attack mode flag, a challenge mode flag, a VB mode flag, a special zone flag, and a BB mode flag are provided. In the present embodiment, when the display mode is a mode corresponding to the RT state higher than the attack mode (VB mode, additional special zone), the attack mode flag is the flag corresponding to that mode (VB mode flag, VB mode flag, It has a structure that coexists with the special zone flag). Therefore, for example, the case where it is determined in step S1304 that the attack mode flag is set includes the case where the attack mode is in progress, the case where the VB mode is in effect, and the case where the special zone is in progress. ..

If the attack mode flag is set in step S1304, since the display mode is already the attack mode, the process for dealing with the winning result is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the attack mode flag is not set, the process for starting the attack mode is performed in steps S1305 to S1307.

That is, in step S1305, the attack mode flag is set. In the following step S1306, the attack mode start command is set as an output target to the sub control device 81. The sub-control device 81 that has received the attack mode start command notifies that the attack mode is started from the next game by the liquid crystal display device 65 or the like. Such notification will be described in detail later. After that, in step S1307, counting of the number of continuous attack modes is started. Specifically, the initial value (for example, 50) of the number of continuous games in the attack mode is set in the attack mode continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. After the processing of step S1307 is performed, the processing for dealing with the winning result is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1302 that the third replay winning prize has not been established, the process proceeds to step S1308. In step S1308, as a result of this stop, it is determined whether or not the fourth and fifth re-game winnings have been established. As described above, when the 4th and 5th re-game winnings have been established, in the RT state processing (FIG. 21), processing for shifting the gaming state to the 3rd RT state is performed. In this case, in step S1309, it is determined whether or not the VB notification flag is set. When the VB notification flag is set, it is determined whether or not the VB mode flag is set. When the VB mode flag is set, since the display mode is already the VB mode, the processing for dealing with the winning result is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the VB mode flag is not set, the process for starting the VB mode is performed in steps S1311 to S1313.

That is, in step S1311, the process of setting the VB mode flag is performed. In this case, the attack mode flag and the VB mode flag coexist in the various flag storage areas 106d. This is a mode in which the VB mode shifts through the attack mode, and after the VB mode ends, the VB mode always shifts to the attack mode.

After that, in step S1312, the VB mode start command is set as an output target to the sub control device 81. The sub-control device 81 that has received the VB mode start command notifies that the VB mode is started from the next game by the liquid crystal display device 65 or the like. Such notification will be described in detail later. Then, in step S1313, counting of the number of continuous VB modes is started. Specifically, the initial value (for example, 60) of the number of continuous games in the VB mode is set in the VB mode continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. After the processing of step S1313 is performed, the processing for dealing with the winning result is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1308 that the 4th and 5th replay winnings have not been established, the process proceeds to step S1314. In step S1314, as a result of this stop, it is determined whether or not the seventh re-game winning is established. In the present embodiment, when the 7th re-game winning is established, that is, the BAR symbol is stopped in the middle stage of the left reel 32L, the BAR symbol is stopped in the middle stage of the middle reel 32M, and the BAR symbol is stopped in the middle stage of the right reel 32R. When the BAR symbol stops on the combination line in the middle row, it is configured to move to the additional special zone. In the additional special zone, the number of continuous games in the attack mode is added not only to the specific role but also to all the possible winning roles (pushing order role, specific role and bonus). The case where the 7th re-game prize is established is the case where the BAR replay 1 is won, and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the operation order corresponding to the 7th re-game prize (FIG. 23). (C)) Further, it is a case where the 7th re-game of the 1st, 6th, and 7th re-games wins a prize, for example, 20 minutes when the BAR replay 1 is won. Win a lottery to win the 7th re-game with a probability of 1.

When the seventh re-game winning is established, it is determined in step S1315 whether or not the VB notification flag is set. When the VB notification flag is set, in step S1316, a process of setting the special zone flag in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106 is performed. The special zone flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that it is the above-mentioned additional special zone, and when the special zone flag is set, the counting of the number of continuous games in the VB mode is stopped. .. In this case, the attack mode flag, the VB mode flag, and the special zone flag coexist in the various flag storage areas 106d. This is because the special zone shifts to the VB mode, and after the special zone ends, it always shifts to the VB mode.

After that, in step S1317, the special zone start command is set as an output target to the sub control device 81. The sub-control device 81 that has received the special zone start command notifies that the special zone is started from the next game by the liquid crystal display device 65 or the like. Such notification will be described in detail later. Then, in step S1318, the counting of the number of continuous special zones is started. Specifically, the initial value (for example, 5) of the number of continuous games in the special zone is set in the special zone continuation counter provided in various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. After the processing of step S1318 is performed, the processing for dealing with the winning result is terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S1314 or step S1315, the winning result handling process is terminated as it is.

As described above, based on the winning of the winning combination (third to fifth replay) corresponding to the transition of the game state, the process for shifting the display mode is performed separately from the RT state process (FIG. 21). conduct. This is to prevent the attack mode etc. from being started based on the winning combination corresponding to the transition of the game state by chance even though the lottery for transitioning the display mode has not been won. Is.

In addition, when shifting to the display mode, among those that accompany the transition to the gaming state, when shifting to a higher mode, that is, when shifting from normal mode or challenge mode to attack mode, or when shifting from attack mode to VB mode, Or, when shifting from the VB mode to the specialized zone, the transition is made based on the winning result of the corresponding winning combination. Therefore, the transition of the display mode and the transition of the game state are performed as a set in the same game. On the other hand, in the case of the transition to the lower mode, the transition to the display mode is not performed when the gaming state shifts due to, for example, the second re-game winning as a fall replay or the stop of the transition roll. When shifting to a lower mode, the game state is managed by the winning result (RT state processing), while the display mode is managed by the number of games. Therefore, when shifting to a lower mode, there is a possibility that the transition of the gaming state and the transition of the display mode are performed in separate games.

<Game number management process>
The game number management process executed in step S1301 of the winning result correspondence process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 39. In the game number management process, the number of precursor games in the precursor mode is counted, and the number of continuous games in the challenge mode, attack mode, VB mode, and special zone is counted, and the number of continuous games in these display modes is 0. Based on the above, a process for terminating the corresponding display mode is performed.

In the game number management process, first, in step S1401, it is determined whether or not the number of bets is a specific number. As described above, in the present embodiment, each game can be played with a bet number of 1 to 3, and in step S1401, it is determined whether or not the specific number is 3 bets. If it is not a 3-bet, the game number management process is terminated as it is. That is, in the 1-bet or 2-bet game, the number of games in the precursor mode and the number of continuous games in the challenge mode are not counted.

If the game ending this time is a 3-bet game, the process proceeds to step S1402. In step S1402, it is determined whether or not the bonus winning flag is set or the bonus state is set. If an affirmative judgment is made in step S1402, the process of clearing each display mode flag of the challenge mode flag, attack mode flag, VB mode flag, and special zone flag is performed in step S1403, and then the game number management process is terminated. do. That is, when the bonus winning flag is set or during the bonus, the number of games such as attack mode is not counted. If each flag is not set in step S1403, that state is maintained.

Incidentally, in step S1403, the attack mode flag, the VB mode flag, and the like are cleared, but the attack notification flag and the VB notification flag are not cleared. Therefore, after the end of the bonus, after the preparation state such as the attack mode is performed, the push order notification for shifting the game state is performed by these flags, and it is possible to return to the game state before the bonus.

If a negative determination is made in step S1402, it is determined in step S1404 whether or not the number of precursor games is 0. If it is not 0, the process of subtracting 1 from the number of precursor games is performed in step S1405. When the number of precursor games is 0 in step S1404 (when the precursor mode is not set), or after the process of step S1405 is executed, the number of continuous games in each mode is counted in steps S1406 to S1427. ..

That is, in step S1406, it is determined whether or not the current display mode is the challenge mode. In the challenge mode, the process proceeds to step S1407 and the challenge mode continuation counter is decremented by 1, so that the number of challenge mode continuation games is subtracted. Then, in step S1408, it is determined whether or not the challenge mode continuation counter is 0. If it is not 0, the game number management process is terminated as it is. If it is 0, the challenge mode flag is cleared in step S1409, and the challenge mode end command is set as an output target to the sub control device 81 in step S1410. The sub-control device 81 that has received the challenge mode end command notifies the liquid crystal display device 65 or the like that the challenge mode ends in this game. After performing the process of step S1410, the game number management process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1406 that the mode is not the challenge mode, the process proceeds to step S1411. In step S1411, it is determined whether or not the current display mode is the attack mode. In the attack mode, the process proceeds to step S1412 and the attack mode continuation counter is decremented by 1, so that the number of attack mode continuation games is decremented. Then, in step S1413, it is determined whether or not the attack mode continuation counter is 0. If it is not 0, the game number management process is terminated as it is. If it is 0, the attack mode flag is cleared in step S1414, and the attack notification flag is cleared in step S1415. After that, in step S1416, the attack mode end command is set as an output target to the sub control device 81. In the sub control device 81 that has received the attack mode end command, the liquid crystal display device 65 or the like notifies that the attack mode ends in this game. Such notification will be described in detail later. After performing the process of step S1416, the game number management process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1411 that the attack mode is not set, the process proceeds to step S1417. In step S1417, it is determined whether or not the current display mode is the VB mode. In the case of the VB mode, the process proceeds to step S1418, and it is determined whether or not the zone is an additional special zone. If it is not an additional special zone, the number of VB mode continuation games is subtracted by performing a process of subtracting 1 from the VB mode continuation counter in step S1419. Then, in step S1420, it is determined whether or not the VB mode continuation counter is 0. If it is not 0, the game number management process is terminated as it is. If it is 0, the VB mode flag is cleared in step S1421, and the VB notification flag is cleared in step S1422. After that, in step S1423, the VB mode end command is set as an output target to the sub control device 81. In the sub control device 81 that has received the VB mode end command, the liquid crystal display device 65 or the like notifies that the VB mode ends in this game. Such notification will be described in detail later. After performing the process of step S1423, the game number management process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1418 that the zone is an additional special zone, the process proceeds to step S1424. In step S1424, the number of special zone continuation games is subtracted by performing a process of subtracting 1 from the special zone continuation counter. Then, in step S1425, it is determined whether or not the special zone continuation counter is 0. If it is 0, the special zone flag is cleared in step S1426, and the special zone end command is set as an output target to the sub control device 81 in step S1427. The sub-control device 81 that has received the special zone end command notifies the liquid crystal display device 65 or the like that the special zone ends in this game. As such notification, for example, the number of games that have been successfully added in total in the special zone this time is notified. After performing the process of step S1427, the game number management process is terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S1417 or step S1425, the game number management process is terminated as it is.

<End judgment processing>
Next, as the process at the end of the bonus, the end determination process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 40. As described above, the end determination process is the process performed in step S615 in the bonus state process (FIG. 26). In the end determination process, the success or failure of the bonus end condition is determined, and when the bonus is terminated, processing for winning notification such as an attack mode in which the bonus and the duplicate winning are performed is performed, and an attack mode in which the bonus and the overlapping winning are performed are performed. Processing for adding the number of games such as.

That is, in step S1501, it is determined whether or not the small winning combination is established. As already explained, the first small winning combination (BB small and medium-sized winning combination 1) is established with high probability during the bonus (FIG. 28). Further, when the player wins in the BB middle red 7 matching combination (IV = 29), the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the operation order corresponding to the 30th small combination winning (FIG. 27 (b)), and further. If the 30th small winning combination of the 1st small winning combination and the 30th small winning combination wins the lottery, the 30th small winning combination is established. In the present embodiment, for example, in the case of winning the BB middle red 7 matching combination, the lottery for winning the 30th small combination is won with a probability of 1/100. When the BAR matching combination (IV = 30) in BB is won, the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the operation order corresponding to the 31st small combination winning (FIG. 27 (b)), and further, the 1st small combination. If the 31st small winning combination of the winning combination and the 31st small winning combination wins the lottery, the 31st small winning combination is established. In the present embodiment, for example, in the case of winning the BAR matching combination in BB, the lottery for winning the 31st small combination is won with a probability of 1/200.

When it is determined in step S1501 that the small winning combination is established, in step S1502, a process of subtracting the number of payouts of the current game from the number of remaining payouts is performed. If a negative determination is made in step S1501 or after the process of step S1502 is executed, the addition process is executed in step S1503. The addition process is a process for granting a privilege other than the payout of the game medium based on the result of the game during the bonus this time. For example, if the result of this game is the 30th small winning combination (7 reds in the lower row), if the display mode before the bonus transition is the normal mode or the challenge mode, the attack mode is won and the normal mode or If it is not in the challenge mode, the number of continuous games in the attack mode is added (for example, 100 games). In addition, when the 31st small winning combination (lower BAR alignment) is established, if the display mode before the bonus transition is the normal mode or the challenge mode, the attack mode and the VB mode are won, and if the attack mode is the VB mode. And win the special zone, if it is in VB mode, win the special zone multiple times (for example, twice), and if it is in the special zone, add the number of continuous games in the attack mode (for example, 300 games). .. In step S1503, a flag (attack mode winning flag, etc.) corresponding to the transition of the display mode is set, and a counter addition process (addition process such as an attack mode continuation counter) is performed according to the number of additional games.

In the following step S1504, it is determined whether or not the number of remaining payouts has become 0. If it is not 0, the end determination process is terminated as it is. If it is 0, after setting the bonus end command as an output target to the sub control device 81 in step S1505, in steps S1506 to S1519, processing for winning notification such as attack mode, attack mode, etc. Performs processing for adding the number of continuous games.

That is, in step S1506, it is determined whether or not the attack mode winning flag is set. When the attack mode winning flag is set, the lottery process for the number of precursor games is performed in step S1507, the number of precursor games is set in step S1508, and the precursor command is set in step S1509. The processing of steps S1507 to S1509 is the same as the processing of steps S808 to S810. After executing the process of step S1509, the end determination process is terminated.

That is, when the bonus ends in the situation where the attack mode is won, after the bonus ends, the attack mode winning notification is performed via the precursor game. Therefore, after the end of the bonus, it is possible to play the game with the expectation that it will shift to an advantageous state again.

Here, if the bonus is won during any of the precursor modes before the winning notification, the precursor games are already set when the lottery process for the precursor games is performed in step S1507. In the present embodiment, even in such a case, the number of precursor games is reset. That is, regardless of the number of remaining games, the number of precursor games at the time of winning the bonus is set again after the bonus ends. By doing this, it is possible to make the feeling of excitement after the bonus ends for a long time.

If the attack mode winning flag is not set in step S1506, it is determined in step S1510 whether or not the challenge mode winning flag is set. When the challenge mode winning flag is set, the process for the precursor mode of steps S1507 to S1509 is performed, and then the end determination process is terminated. If the challenge mode winning flag is not set in step S1510, it is determined in step S1511 whether or not the VB mode winning flag is set. When the VB mode winning flag is set, the process for the precursor mode of steps S1507 to S1509 is performed, and then the end determination process is terminated. That is, when the bonus ends in the situation where the challenge mode and the VB mode are also won, after the bonus ends, the winning notification of the challenge mode and the VB mode is performed through the precursor game.

If the VB mode winning flag is not set in step S1511, the process proceeds to step S1512. In step S1512, it is determined whether or not the attack mode addition flag is set. When the attack mode addition flag is set, the attack mode addition game number lottery process is performed in step S1513, the attack mode game number addition process is performed in step S1514, and the addition command is set in step S1515. .. The processing of steps S1513 to S1515 is the same as the processing of steps S917 to S919. After executing the process of step S1515, the end determination process is terminated.

If the attack mode addition flag is not set in step S1512, it is determined in step S1516 whether or not the challenge mode addition flag is set. When the challenge mode addition flag is set, the challenge mode addition game number lottery process is performed in step S1517, the challenge mode game number addition process is performed in step S1518, and the addition command is set in step S1519. .. The processing of steps S1517 to S1519 is the same as the processing of steps S820 to S822. When a negative determination is made in step S1516, or after the process of step S1519 is executed, the end determination process is terminated.

<Processing for specialized zones>
Next, the processing for the special zone will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 41. The special zone processing is the processing executed in step S712 in the lottery result correspondence processing (FIG. 31). As already explained, the special zone shifts to the VB mode, and during the special zone, the number of continuous games in the attack mode is added to each game.

That is, in the special zone processing, first, the result of the current lottery processing is grasped in step S1601. In the following step S1602, the attack mode additional game number lottery process is performed. In the following step S1603, the number of games in the attack mode is added. Then, in step S1604, after setting the addition command, the processing for the special zone is terminated. The processing of steps S1602 to S1604 is the same as the processing of steps S917 to S919. However, the number of additional games selected in the additional game number lottery process in step S1602 is larger than that in the additional game number lottery process in step S917.

<Processing related to notification effect on the sub side>
Next, various notification processes performed by the sub control device 81 will be described as (4) processing related to the notification effect on the sub side. As various notification processes, an effect setting process executed at a predetermined cycle (2 msec cycle) is provided. Therefore, the effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 42.

In the effect setting process, first, in step S1701, it is determined whether or not a new command has been received from the main control device 101. If a new command has been received, in step S1702, a process of storing the received command in the RAM 84 is executed. The RAM 84 is provided with a command storage area, and the command storage area is configured as a ring buffer that can store a plurality of commands individually and can be read from the previously stored command.

When a negative determination is made in step S1701, or after the process of step S1702 is executed, it is determined in step S1703 whether or not the newly received command is a bet command. The bet command is a command output from the main control device 101 based on the bet operation, and is a mode transition notification process (FIG. 6) in addition to the bet command set in step S207 of the normal process. There are a challenge mode start command, an attack mode winning notification command, a VB mode winning notification command, and the like in 35). In the case of these bet-time commands, the bet-time effect setting process is executed in step S1704.

If a negative determination is made in step S1703, or after the process of step S1704 is executed, it is determined in step S1705 whether or not the newly received command is the start command. The start command is a command output from the main control device 101 based on the operation of the start lever 41. In addition to the lottery result command set in step S311 of the lottery process, the first to third commands are used. There are precursor commands and addition commands set in the third specific combination processing (FIGS. 32 to 34), push order notification commands set in the push order combination processing (FIG. 37), and the like. In the case of these start-time commands, the start-time effect setting process is executed in step S1706.

When a negative determination is made in step S1705, or after the process of step S1706 is executed, it is determined in step S1707 whether or not the newly received command is a command at the time of each stop operation. Each stop operation command is a command output from the main control device 101 based on the stop operation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and is a command output from step S407 of the reel control process (FIG. 18). It is a command set in the stop command correspondence process in. In the case of each stop operation command, step S1708 executes each stop operation effect setting process.

If a negative determination is made in step S1707, or after the process of step S1708 is executed, it is determined in step S1709 whether or not the newly received command is a command at the time of total stop. The all-stop command is a command output from the main control device 101 based on the fact that all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped, and the winning result set in step S411 of the reel control process (FIG. 18). In addition to the commands, the attack mode start command, VB mode start command, special zone start command, challenge mode end command, attack mode end command, VB mode end command, and specialization set in the winning result correspondence process (Fig. 38). There is a zone end command, etc. In the case of these commands at the time of total stop, the effect setting process at the time of total stop is executed in step S1710.

If a negative determination is made in step S1709, or after the process of step S1710 is executed, other processes are executed in step S1711. In step S1711, the effect based on the command from the main control device 101 other than the bet time, the start time, and the stop time (for example, the effect based on the operation of the settlement switch 59) is set, and the connection is made without going through the main control device 101. Set the effect based on the signal from the sensor (effect switch detection sensor, etc.), set for error notification, and so on.

After performing the setting processing of various effects in steps S1701 to S1711, the effect data setting process is performed in step S1712, and then the present effect setting process ends. In the effect data setting process, data (effect command) and sound effect for display effect are performed so that the effect set by the sub control device 81 is performed as a display effect by the display control device 201 and a sound effect by the sound source IC85. It is a process to set the data (sound data) for.

Hereinafter, the bet time effect setting process, the start time effect setting process, each stop operation time effect setting process, and the all stop time effect setting process will be described. In addition, in the description of each effect setting process, it will be described with reference to the schematic views of the display effects of FIGS. 54 to 59. The staging data setting process will be described after each staging setting process, but in the following description, the display staging performed when the display staging data and the sound staging data are set based on each staging setting process. And the outline of the sound production will be explained together.

<Bet production setting process>
The bet-time effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 43.

In step S1801, it is determined whether or not the challenge mode start command is included as the bet command received this time. When the challenge mode start command is included, the process of setting the challenge mode start effect is performed in step S1802. In the challenge mode start effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 54A, the liquid crystal display device 65 displays the characters "challenge mode start", and the display mode to be shifted is easy to win the attack mode transition lottery. A display suggesting that the mode is a chance mode (for example, a predetermined character display) is performed. In addition, in the challenge mode start effect, the corresponding sound effect (for example, "grab the attack mode!" With a male's thick voice) is emitted from the speaker device 64.

If the challenge mode start command is not included in step S1801, it is determined in step S1803 whether or not the attack mode winning notification command is included as the bet time command received this time. When the attack mode winning notification command is included, the process of setting the attack mode winning notification effect is performed in step S1804. In the attack mode winning notification effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 55A, the liquid crystal display device 65 displays the characters “attack mode confirmed”. In addition, in the attack mode winning notification effect, the corresponding sound effect (for example, "attack number one!" With a high voice of a woman) is emitted from the speaker device 64.

If the attack mode winning notification command is not included in step S1803, it is determined in step S1805 whether or not the VB mode winning notification command is included as the bet time command received this time. When the VB mode winning notification command is included, the process of setting the VB mode winning notification effect is performed in step S1806. In the VB mode winning notification effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 55 (b), the character display of "VICTORYBONUS confirmed" is performed on the liquid crystal display device 65. In addition, in the VB mode winning notification effect, the corresponding sound effect (for example, "Victory!" In the voices of men and women) is emitted from the speaker device 64.

After executing any of the processes of step S1802, step S1804, and step S1806, or when a negative determination is made in step S1805, the other bet time effect is set in step S1807, and then the present effect setting process is performed. To finish. In the process of step S1807, for example, in response to the reception of the bet command, the lamps around (or inside) the credit insertion switches 56 to 58 of the corresponding number of bets are turned off to notify that the operation is accepted. Or, for example, a process for returning from the demo mode that shifts to one condition that the game has not been performed for a predetermined time, or turning on the lamp around the start lever 41 to notify that the operation has become effective. Perform processing, etc.

<Starting staging setting process>
Next, the start-time effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S1901, the display mode setting process is performed. In such processing, it is determined whether the display mode currently set on the main control device 101 side is a normal mode, a challenge mode, an attack mode, a VB mode, or a specialized zone, and the corresponding display mode is used. , The display effect of the liquid crystal display device 65 is set to be performed. Specifically, the challenge mode flag, the attack mode flag, the VB mode flag, and the special zone flag are set as the flags for grasping the display mode also in the various flag storage areas 84b of the RAM 84 on the sub control device 81 side. An area is provided, the corresponding flag is set at the start of each mode, and the corresponding flag is cleared at the end. For example, the challenge mode flag is set in the setting process of the challenge mode start effect in step S1802. In step S1901, by grasping these various mode correspondence flags, the current display mode is specified, and the display control device 201, the sound source IC 85, the upper lamp 63, and the like are controlled so that the corresponding effects are performed.

Here, in the display mode setting process, if the display effect corresponding to the display mode has already been set, the display effect of the same display mode is not set again. That is, at the start of the game in which the display mode has been changed, the display effect corresponding to the display mode of the new transfer destination is set, but if the display mode has not changed, the display effect of the previous game is set. To continue. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate the increase in processing load due to the display mode setting process being performed at the start of each game, and to set a new display effect by shifting the display mode, and to set the display mode. It is possible to make it easier to recognize that the display mode has changed due to the difference from the fact that the display effect of the previous game is continued by not changing. It is also possible to associate the joy and disappointment of the transition of the display mode with such a difference.

In the following step S1902, based on the received lottery result command, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the game started this time is a push order winning combination. If the push order combination is won, the push order notification process is performed in step S1903. Here, the push order notification process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 45.

In step S2001, it is determined whether or not the push order notification command is included as the start command received this time. If the push order notification command is not included, the main push order notification process is terminated as it is. If the push order notification command is included, the process proceeds to step S2002.

In step S2002, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of this time is the first promotion replays 1 to 4. In the case of the first promotion replays 1 to 4, in step S2003, the display control device 201, the sound source IC85, etc. are controlled so as to notify the push order in which the third replay winning is established, and then the push order is obtained. The notification process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S2002 that the first promotion replays 1 to 4 have not been won, it is determined in step S2004 whether or not the current lottery result is the fall replays 1 to 3. In the case of fall replays 1 to 3, the process proceeds to step S2005, the display control device 201, the sound source IC85, etc. are controlled so as to perform the push order notification in which the first replay winning is established, and then the push order notification is performed. End the process.

If it is determined in step S2004 that it is not the fall replays 1 to 3, it is determined in step S2006 whether or not the current lottery result is the second promotion replays 1 and 2. In the case of the second promotion replays 1 and 2, it is determined in step S2007 whether or not the VB mode winning notification effect has already been executed. For example, when setting the VB mode winning notification effect in step S1806, a notification flag indicating that the VB winning notification has been performed is set in the various flag storage areas 84b of the RAM 84. The notified flag is cleared based on the transition to the VB mode. Then, in step S2007, it is preferable to configure the configuration to determine the presence / absence of the notified flag. If the winning notification of the VB mode has been completed, the display control device 201, the sound source IC85, etc. are controlled so as to perform the push order notification that the 4th and 5th replay winnings are established in step S2008, and then. The push order notification process ends. If the winning notification in the VB mode has not been completed, the process proceeds to step S2005, the push order notification for the first re-game winning is performed, and then the push order notification process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S2006 that it is not the second promotion replays 1 and 2, it is determined in step S2009 whether or not the current lottery result is BAR replays 1 and 2. In the case of BAR replays 1 and 2, in step S2010, the mode correspondence flag is confirmed, and it is determined whether or not the current display mode is the VB mode. When in the VB mode, the display control device 201, the sound source IC85, etc. are controlled so as to perform the push order notification in which the 6th to 8th replay winnings are established in step S2011, and then for the push order notification. End the process. If it is not in the VB mode, the process proceeds to step S2005, the push order notification for the first re-game winning is performed, and then the push order notification process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S2009 that it is not BAR replays 1 and 2, it is determined in step S2012 whether or not the lottery result this time is a bell. If the bell is won, in step S2013, the display control device 201, the sound source IC85, etc. are controlled so as to notify the push order in which the bell winning is established as the first small winning combination, and then the push order notification process is performed. To finish. If a negative determination is made in step S2012, the push order notification process is terminated as it is.

Returning to the description of the start-time effect setting process (FIG. 44), if it is determined in step S1902 that the push order combination is not won, it is determined in step S1904 whether or not the specific combination is won. If the specific combination is won, the specific combination notification process is performed in step S1905. The specific combination notification process will be described in detail later.

If a negative determination is made in step S1904, or after the process of step S1903 or step S1905 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1906. In step S1906, it is determined whether or not an additional command is received as the command at the start of this time. When the addition command is received, in step S1907, a process of setting the addition effect in advance is performed so that the addition effect of the number of games corresponding to the addition command is executed at the time of stop. As an additional effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 58 (b), the liquid crystal display device 65 displays a numerical value corresponding to the number of additional games as “+10”. In addition, in the additional effect, the corresponding sound effect (for example, "Kyukyukyukyuin!") Is emitted from the speaker device 64.

Here, the setting process of the addition effect of step S1907 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S2101, a process of grasping the number of additional games is performed based on the additional command received this time. In the following step S2102, the notification timing lottery process is executed. The notification timing lottery process is a process of drawing a lottery at which timing in the game the additional effect is performed on the premise that the additional effect is performed in the current game.

The additional effect is set so that the execution timing differs depending on the number of additional games. Specifically, as shown in the lottery table of FIG. 47, as the execution timing of the additional effect in this game, the first reel, the second reel, and the third reel are set in the order of the stop operation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. Then, the stop operation of the first reel, the stop operation of the second reel, and the stop operation of the third reel are set. Then, among the stop operations of each reel, the timing when the stop ON operation is performed when the press operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is performed, the timing when the stop OFF operation is performed when the press operation is completed, and the timing when the stop OFF operation is performed. Is set.

Here, the operation mode of the stop switches 42 to 44 will be supplementarily described. The stop switches 42 to 44 can be displaced from the initial position arranged on the front side to the operation position arranged on the back side. In the situation where it is arranged at the initial position, the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a are in the LOW state, and by operating from the initial position to the operation position, the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a are generated. Switch to HI signal. Then, the main control device 101 grasps that the stop ON operation is performed, which is assumed to be the pressing operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, based on the fact that the detection signal is switched from the LOW signal to the HI signal.

Further, the stop switches 42 to 44 are urged toward the initial position by a spring or the like. Therefore, if the operation force (pushing pressure) pushed toward the operation position is not applied by releasing the hand from the stop switches 42 to 44, the stop switches 42 to 44 will be in the initial position due to the urging force of the spring or the like. Return to. In this case, the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a are switched from the HI signal to the LOW signal. Then, the main control device 101 grasps that the stop OFF operation is performed assuming that the pressing operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is completed based on the fact that the detection signal is switched from the HI signal to the LOW signal.

The addition effect is set so that the stop operation of each of the stop switches 42 to 44 can occur at either the stop ON operation or the stop OFF operation. That is, in a game in which the additional effect is generated, the additional effect can be generated not only at the timing when the stop switches 42 to 44 are pressed but also at the timing when the pressing operation is completed.

In the execution timing table of the additional effect, as the number of games with a relatively small number of additional games, for example, when 5 to 10 games are added, the timing at which the stop ON operation of the first reel is performed is selected at 50%. , The timing when the stop OFF operation of the first reel is performed is 5%, the stop ON operation of the second reel is 20%, the stop OFF operation of the second reel is 5%, and the stop ON operation of the third reel is 10%. The stop OFF operation of the third reel (when all reels are stopped) is 10%, and each is selected. In this case, it is easier to select when the stop ON operation of each reel is performed than when the stop OFF operation is performed.

On the other hand, as the number of games with a relatively large number of additional games, for example, when 100 or more games are added, the timing at which the stop ON operation of the first reel is performed is selected at 5%, and the stop OFF operation of the first reel is performed. Was performed at 20%, the stop ON operation of the 2nd reel was 10%, the stop OFF operation of the 2nd reel was 35%, the stop ON operation of the 3rd reel was 10%, and the stop OFF operation of the 3rd reel ( (When all reels are stopped) is 20%, and each is selected. In this case, it is easier to select when the stop OFF operation of each reel is performed than when the stop ON operation is performed.

That is, in the present embodiment, the additional effect of a large number of games is more likely to occur when the additional effect is generated during the stop OFF operation than when the additional effect is generated when the stop ON operation of each reel is performed. It is set. Further, when comparing the first to third reels, it is easy to select the number of games with the largest number of games when the second reel is stopped (ON operation, OFF operation), and the game with the second largest number of games when the third reel is stopped is selected. It is easy to set so that the smallest number of games can be easily selected when the first reel is stopped.

In this way, since the number of additional games to be notified differs depending on the stop order, the expectation for the additional effect can be different for each stop operation. For example, it can be expected that the effect will occur at the time of the stop operation in which a large number of additional effects are likely to occur. Specifically, the stop operation of the second reel, particularly the stop OFF operation of the second reel, can be expected. Sometimes you can expect it. In this case, for example, the player who expects the additional effect at the time of the stop / OFF operation of the second reel wishes to calm the mind once and generate the additional effect before the stop / OFF operation of the second reel. At the same time, it is considered that the stop / OFF operation of the second reel is performed.

That is, if there is a possibility that a notification that is advantageous to the player may occur when a predetermined operation is performed, the player temporarily interrupts the game before the predetermined operation due to the expectation for the notification. However, there are cases where the predetermined operation is performed after making time for saving and enjoying the saving time to the fullest. By doing so, it is possible to fully enjoy the notification rather than performing the advantageous notification without mental preparation. In that respect, as described above, by increasing the expectation during the stop-off operation of the second reel, a saving time is created before the stop-off operation of the second reel, that is, during the stop-on-on operation of the second reel. It will be easier. In this way, in relation to the notification timing of the obtained privilege, it becomes easy to make a saving time in the middle of the stop operation.

Returning to the explanation of the setting process of the addition effect, after the notification timing lottery process is performed in step S2102, it is determined in step S2103 whether or not the lottery result of step S2102 is when the stop of any reel is ON. judge. When the stop is ON, the target reel for generating the additional effect is set in step S2104, and the additional effect is set to be generated when the stop ON operation of the target reel is performed. Specifically, a process of setting any of the first reel stop ON operation flag to the third reel stop ON operation flag is performed in the various flag storage areas 84b. These flags are flags for the CPU 82 to grasp the additional effect generation timing. Further, in step S2104, a process of reading the effect data of the additional effect corresponding to the number of additional games generated at the time of the stop ON operation from the effect data storage area and temporarily storing the data in the predetermined effect data setting area is performed. conduct. When the CPU 82 grasps that the additional effect is generated at the timing corresponding to the stop ON operation flag, the CPU 82 reads out the effect data temporarily stored in the effect data setting area so that the additional effect is performed.

If a negative determination is made in step S2103, it is determined in step S2105 whether or not the stop OFF operation of the first reel or the second reel has been performed. When the stop / OFF operation of these reels is performed, the target reel for generating the additional effect is set in step S2106, and the additional effect is set to be generated at the time of the stop / OFF operation of the target reel. Specifically, a process of setting either the first reel stop OFF operation flag or the second reel stop OFF operation flag is performed in the various flag storage areas 84b. These flags are also flags for the CPU 82 to grasp the additional effect generation timing. Further, also in step S2106, a process of reading the effect data of the additional effect corresponding to the number of additional games from the effect data storage area and temporarily storing the data in a predetermined effect data setting area is performed.

If a negative determination is made in step S2105, the addition effect this time is set to occur when all reels are stopped (when the stop / OFF operation of the third reel is performed) in step S2107. Specifically, a process of setting a flag at the time of a third reel stop OFF operation is performed in the various flag storage areas 84b. Further, also in step S2107, temporary storage processing of the effect data of the additional effect corresponding to the number of additional games is performed. After the processing of step S2104, step S2106, or step S2107 is executed, the setting processing of the addition effect is completed.

Returning to the explanation of the start-time effect setting process, if the addition command is not received in step S1906, or after the process of step S1907 is executed, the bonus notification process is executed in step S1908, and the bonus notification process is executed in step S1909. The continuous effect setting process is executed, and then, in step S1910, other start-time effects are set, and then the start-time effect setting process ends. The bonus notification process and the continuous effect setting process will be described in detail later. In the process of step S1910, for example, an effect suggesting a lottery result is set corresponding to the start of the game, or a process of turning off the lamp around the start lever 41 to notify that the operation is accepted is performed.

<Production setting process for each stop operation>
Next, each stop operation effect setting process performed in step S1708 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 48.

In step S2201, it is determined whether or not each stop operation command received this time is a stop ON operation command. The stop ON operation command is a command output from the main control device 101 when the stop switches 42 to 44 are pressed among the stop operations of each reel.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2201, the process proceeds to step S2202, and it is determined whether or not an effect generated when the reel is stopped ON is set as the effect of this game. If it is not set, this setting process ends as it is. If it is set, in step S2203, it is determined whether or not the stop ON operation command received this time is the stop operation of the reel that is the target of the effect at the time of the set stop ON operation. If it is not the stop ON operation of the target reel, this setting process is terminated as it is. In the case of the stop ON operation of the target reel, the display control device 201, the sound source IC 85, etc. are controlled so that the stop ON operation effect is performed in step S2204, and then the setting process is terminated.

For example, when the additional effect is set as the effect at the time of the stop ON operation this time, as shown in FIG. 49 (a), the liquid crystal display device 65 is at the timing when the stop switches 42 to 44 are pressed (ON operation). An additional effect will occur at. Further, in this case, the sound effect corresponding to the additional effect is emitted from the speaker device 64.

Further, for example, when the current game is a push order winning combination and the push order notification effect is set, the push order notification effect is the next operation target by stopping the corresponding reel based on each stop ON operation. It changes to the production showing the reel that becomes. Specifically, if all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are rotating before the stop ON operation effect, the display is made so that the first reel shown in FIG. 36A is the operation target. .. Then, when the corresponding reel (middle reel 32M in the figure) is stopped by the stop ON operation corresponding to the first reel, the reel to be operated next (right reel 32R in the figure) shown in FIG. 36B is shown. It changes to a production. Further, if the two reels are rotating before the stop ON operation effect, the display indicating that the second reel shown in FIG. 36B is the stop target is displayed, and the second reel is displayed by the stop ON operation. Based on the fact that the reels are stopped, the display changes to the display (FIG. 36 (c)) in which the third reel is the stop target.

If a negative determination is made in step S2201, the process proceeds to step S2205, and it is determined whether or not each stop operation command received this time is a stop OFF operation command. The stop OFF operation command is a command output from the main control device 101 when the pressing operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is completed among the stop operations of each reel.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2205, the process proceeds to step S2206, and it is determined whether or not an effect generated when the reel stop OFF operation is set is set as the effect of this game. If it is not set, this setting process ends as it is. If it is set, in step S2207, it is determined whether or not the stop OFF operation command received this time is the stop operation of the reel that is the target of the effect at the time of the set stop OFF operation. If it is not the stop OFF operation of the target reel, this setting process is terminated as it is. In the case of the stop OFF operation of the target reel, the display control device 201, the sound source IC 85, etc. are controlled so that the stop OFF operation effect is performed in step S2208, and then the setting process is terminated.

For example, when the additional effect is set as the effect at the time of the stop OFF operation this time, as shown in FIG. 49 (b), the pressing operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is completed, and the stop switches 42 to 44 are used. At the timing when the hand is released, an additional effect is generated on the liquid crystal display device 65. Further, in this case, the sound effect corresponding to the additional effect is emitted from the speaker device 64.

If a negative determination is made in step S2205, each stop operation effect setting process is terminated as it is.

<Production setting process when all are stopped>
Next, the effect setting process at the time of total stop will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S2301, it is determined whether or not the challenge mode end command is included as the stop command received this time. When the challenge mode end command is included, the display control device 201, the sound source IC 85, and the like are controlled so that the challenge mode end effect is performed in step S2302. In the challenge mode end effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 54 (b), the characters "Challenge mode end" are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 65. In addition, in the challenge mode end effect, a sound effect corresponding to the end of the challenge mode (for example, "Make more devotion!" With a male's thick voice) is emitted from the speaker device 64.

If the challenge mode end command is not included in step S2301, it is determined in step S2303 whether or not the attack mode start command is included as the stop command received this time. If the attack mode start command is included, the process of setting the attack mode start effect is performed in step S2304. In the attack mode start effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 56 (a), the character display of "attack mode !! Ver.1" is performed on the liquid crystal display device 65. In addition, in the attack mode start effect, the corresponding sound effect (for example, "attack mode start!" With a high voice of a woman) is emitted from the speaker device 64.

By the way, the display of "Ver.1" in the attack mode start effect corresponds to the rank of the attack mode. That is, it is a display indicating that the attack mode started this time is the first attack mode. Then, when the rank of the attack mode is promoted to the second attack mode (when the promotion command is received), the characters "attack mode !! Ver.2" are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 65 as the promotion effect. In addition, when the rank of the attack mode is promoted to the third attack mode, the characters "attack mode !! Ver.3" are displayed, and when the rank is promoted to the fourth attack mode, the characters "attack mode !! Ver.4" are displayed. The display is done.

If the attack mode start command is not included in step S2303, it is determined in step S2305 whether or not the attack mode end command is included as the stop command received this time. If the attack mode end command is included, the process of setting the attack mode end effect is performed in step S2306. In the attack mode end effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 56B, the liquid crystal display device 65 displays the characters "attack mode END" and includes the current attack mode (VB mode, special zone). ) Is displayed, and the total number of payouts in this attack mode (including VB mode, special zone, and bonus) is displayed. In addition, in the attack mode end effect, the speaker device 64 emits a corresponding sound effect (for example, “See you” in a high-pitched female voice).

If the attack mode end command is not included in step S2305, it is determined in step S2307 whether or not the VB mode start command is included as the stop command received this time. If the VB mode start command is included, the process of setting the VB mode start effect is performed in step S2308. In the VB mode start effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 57 (a), the character display of "777 VICTORY !!" is performed on the liquid crystal display device 65. In addition, in the VB mode start effect, the corresponding sound effect (for example, "Victory bonus start" in the voices of men and women) is emitted from the speaker device 64.

If the VB mode start command is not included in step S2307, it is determined in step S2311 whether or not the VB mode end command is included as the stop command received this time. If the VB mode end command is included, the process of setting the VB mode end effect is performed in step S2312. In the VB mode end effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 57 (b), the liquid crystal display device 65 displays the characters "VICTORY BONUS END" and the number of continuous games in the attack mode at the end of the current VB mode. The number of continuous games (including VB mode and special zone) is displayed, and the total number of payouts in the attack mode (including VB mode, special zone and bonus) at the end of this VB mode is displayed. In addition, in the VB mode end effect, the corresponding sound effect (for example, "it will continue" in the voices of men and women) is emitted from the speaker device 64.

If the VB mode end command is not included in step S2311, it is determined in step S2313 whether or not the special zone start command is included as the stop command received this time. If the special zone start command is included, the process of setting the special zone start effect is performed in step S2314. In the special zone start effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 58 (a), the liquid crystal display device 65 displays the characters "Additional challenge !!" and a special mode in which the attack mode is likely to be added. The character suggesting that is is displayed. In addition, in the special zone start effect, the corresponding sound effect (for example, "go" by the voice of a boy) is emitted from the speaker device 64.

If the special zone start command is not included in step S2313, it is determined in step S2315 whether or not the special zone end command is included as the stop command received this time. If the special zone end command is included, the process of setting the special zone end effect is performed in step S2316. In the special zone end effect, for example, the liquid crystal display device 65 displays the total number of games added in the special zone this time. In addition, in the special zone end effect, the corresponding sound effect (for example, "Kyukyukyukyuin!") Is emitted from the speaker device 64. It is preferable to make the display contents of the liquid crystal display device 65 and the sound effects emitted from the speaker device 64 different according to the total number of additional games.

If the special zone end command is not included in step S2315, it is determined in step S2317 whether or not the bonus end command is included as the stop command received this time. If the bonus end command is included, the process of setting the bonus end effect is performed in step S2318. In the bonus end effect, for example, the liquid crystal display device 65 displays the total number of payouts acquired during this bonus, and if the bonus has moved to the attack mode, VB mode, or special zone, the attack mode (attack mode). Display the total number of payouts (including VB mode, special zone, bonus). In addition, in the bonus end production, a character or the like suggesting these contents is performed according to the success or failure of the attack mode, the success or failure of the challenge mode, and the number of additional games.

After executing any of the processes of step S2302, step S2304, step S2306, step S2308, step S2312, step S2314, step S2316 and step S2318, or after making a negative determination in step S2315, the process goes to step S2309 and step S2319. move on. In steps S2309 and S2319, the display control device 201 and the sound source IC 85 are controlled so as to execute the additional effect when the additional effect is set. As described above, the setting of the additional effect is performed in step S1907 in the start effect setting process. Specifically, when the generation timing of the additional effect this time is set at the time of full stop in the setting process of the additional effect (FIG. 46), all the reels 32L and 32M are as shown in FIG. 49 (c). , 32R is stopped, and an additional effect is generated on the liquid crystal display device 65. Further, in this case, the sound effect corresponding to the additional effect is emitted from the speaker device 64.

After that, in step S2310 and step S2320, other stop-time effects are set, and then the present effect setting process ends. In step S2310 and step S2320, for example, the sound source IC85 is controlled so that the upper lamp 63 is lit in a color corresponding to the winning combination, and the sound effect corresponding to the number of payouts of the winning combination is emitted from the speaker device 64. The sound source IC 85 is controlled so that the sound effect corresponding to the automatic bet at the time of replay is emitted from the speaker device 64.

As described above, based on various commands from the main control device 101, various processes for notifying the transition of the display mode are performed on the sub control device 81 side, and the notification is performed by the liquid crystal display device 65 or the like. In addition, on the sub-control device 81 side, in addition to notifying the transition of these display modes, various in-game staging processes are performed.

<Processing for directing during various games>
In the present embodiment, as the effects during various games, a continuous effect and a bonus effect are provided. The continuous production is a production that expects a favorable result for the player (winning a bonus, an attack mode, a challenge mode, a VB mode, etc.), and is a game of multiple times (4 times in this embodiment). It is a production that can be continued over a period of time, and is a production in which notification of whether or not the advantageous result was achieved in the final game is performed. The bonus medium effect is an effect performed in each game in the bonus state that shifts based on the first BB and the second BB prizes.

The outline of the continuous production will be described with reference to FIG. 59.

For example, as shown in FIG. 59 (a), a display suggesting the number of times the continuous effect is continued is displayed at the start of the first game in which the continuous effect is set (in the figure, four stages corresponding to the continuous effect of four games). Shows a daruma-dropping effect). Then, at the end of the first game in which the continuous effect is set, an effect of notifying whether or not the continuous effect is continued is performed (the figure shows the effect that the first stage of the Daruma doll has been successfully dropped. It shows that the continuous production will continue). When the continuous effect is interrupted, at the end of the first game in which the continuous effect is set, an effect is performed to notify that the continuous effect ends in the middle (for example, an effect in which the first stage daruma drop fails). ). The effect regarding the presence or absence of continuation of the continuous effect is the same in each game in the continuous effect.

As shown in FIG. 59 (b), at the start of the second game in which the continuous effect is set, a display suggesting the number of remaining continuous effects is displayed (in the figure, the remaining three stages of the Daruma drop effect). Then, at the end of the second game, an effect of notifying whether or not the continuous effect is continued is performed (the figure shows the effect that the second stage daruma doll has been successfully removed, and the continuous effect is continued. Is shown).

As shown in FIG. 59 (c), at the start of the third game in which the continuous effect is set, a display suggesting the number of remaining continuous effects is displayed (in the figure, the remaining two-stage Daruma drop effect). Then, at the end of the third game, an effect of notifying whether or not the continuous effect is continued is performed (the figure shows the effect that the third stage daruma drop is successful, and the continuous effect is continued. Is shown).

As shown in FIG. 59 (d), at the start of the final game (fourth game) of the continuous production, a display suggesting that it is the final game of the continuous production is performed (in the figure, the one-stage Daruma drop effect). Then, at the end of the final game, an effect of whether or not the result is advantageous for the player is performed (the figure shows an effect that the final stage of the Daruma doll has been successfully removed).

As described above, in the continuous production, the production of the next game is set by taking over the production of the previous game, and the production of each game has continuity. In addition, it is possible to clearly recognize how many games the current game is from the start of the continuous production (how many games are there until the end of the continuous production).

Here, in each game of continuous production, whether or not the continuous production is continued until the next game is set so that the continuation rate becomes higher as the game of continuous production progresses. That is, at the end of the first game of the continuous effect, the possibility of being notified of the discontinuation of the continuous effect is the highest, and as the game progresses, the possibility of being notified of the discontinuation is low. Therefore, in the continuous production, the level of interest of the player differs greatly depending on the number of games in the continuous production of the current game, and the higher the interest is drawn as the game progresses from the start game to the end game. ..

The setting of the continuous effect is performed in the specific combination notification process (step S1905), the bonus notification process (step S1908), and the continuous effect setting process (step S1909) in the start effect setting process (FIG. 44). Therefore, each process will be described below in order.

<Process for bonus notification>
First, the bonus notification process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the bonus notification process, first, in step S2401, it is determined whether or not the game to be started is a bonus winning game based on the lottery result command received this time. In the case of a bonus winning game, in step S2402, a notification game lottery process for notifying the bonus winning is executed. In the notification game lottery process, the number of games after which the bonus winning is notified is determined by lottery. Specifically, 1 notification game is determined from 0 games (notified in this game) to 10 games. In the lottery of the notification game, the notification game may be different depending on the winning combination (whether or not the winning combination is duplicated, and if the notification game is duplicated, the type of the duplicated small combination, etc.). For example, if the bonus is won by overlapping strong cherries, a small number of games may be easily selected, and if the bonus is won by overlapping weak cherries, a large number of games may be easily selected.

In the following step S2403, a process of setting the number of continuous production games is performed based on the notification game determined by the process of step S2402. Specifically, in step S2403, the continuous effect game is set in the continuous effect counters provided in the various counter areas 84c. The continuous effect counter is a counter for grasping the number of games until the result is notified, and is decremented by 1 for each game. For example, in a configuration in which continuous production of four games is performed, continuous production is started in a game in which the continuous production counter is 4, and result notification is performed in a game in which the continuous production counter is 0. More specifically, for example, when it is decided in step S2402 that the bonus winning is notified after 10 games, 10 is input to the continuous effect counter in step S2403. In this case, the continuous effect starts from the game in which the continuous effect counter is 4. If it is decided in step S2402 to notify the bonus winning after 5 games, 5 is input to the continuous effect counter in step S2403. Even in this case, the continuous effect starts from the game in which the continuous effect counter is 4.

If less than 4 notification games are set in step S2402, the continuous production is started from the middle. For example, if it is decided in step S2402 that the bonus winning is notified after two games, 2 is input to the continuous effect counter in step S2403. In this case, the continuous production starts from this game, and is performed from the production of the third continuous production game of FIG. 59 (c).

After executing the process of step S2403, the continuous effect flag is set in the various flag storage areas 84b in step S2404. The continuous effect flag is a flag for the CPU 82 to grasp that the continuous effect is being executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S2401, or after the process of step S2404 is executed, the process proceeds to step S2405. In step S2405, it is determined whether or not the bonus game is started from this game. The bonus game corresponds to a game from the next game in which the first BB or the second BB wins to the end of the bonus. The case where the affirmative judgment is made in step S2405 is the case where the first BB or the second BB prize is established in the previous game. In this case, in step S2406, the number of bonus effect games is set in the effect counter during the bonus of various counter areas 84c in the RAM 84. The bonus middle effect counter is a counter for executing the effect set for each game according to the progress of the bonus game, and the effect corresponding to the counter is performed by the liquid crystal display device 65 or the like.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the bonus games of the first BB and the second BB, the winning combination in which nine medals are paid out in each game is won, and the bonus ends with the payout of 216 medals. That is, the bonus games of the first BB and the second BB end in 24 games. The effect in the bonus game is set to be executed over 24 games, and the above-mentioned bonus medium effect counter is a counter for grasping which game of the 24 games should be produced. Is. Then, in step S2406, 24 is set in the bonus effect counter as the number of bonus effect games, and the subtraction process of the bonus effect counter is performed in each game of the bonus game. After the processing of step S2406 is performed, in step S2407, the bonus middle effect flag is set in the various flag storage areas 84b. The bonus-during effect flag is a flag for the CPU 82 to grasp that the bonus-during effect is being executed. If a negative determination is made in step S2405, or after the process of step S2407 is executed, the bonus notification process is terminated.

<Process for notifying specific role>
Next, the specific combination notification process executed in step S1905 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S2501, it is determined whether or not the precursor command is included as the start command of this time. If the precursor command is not included, it is determined in step S2502 whether or not the additional command is included as the start command of this time. If the addition command is not included, it is determined in step S2503 whether or not the bonus has been won. If you have not won the bonus, that is, if you have won a specific role as a result of the lottery, you have not won the lottery to shift to challenge mode, attack mode, VB mode, or the lottery to add the number of continuous games. If the bonus is not won, the lottery process in the pseudo precursor mode is executed in step S2504. Although it is difficult to distinguish the pseudo-precursor mode from the precursor mode in appearance, in the precursor mode, the player is notified of a favorable result (such as winning the challenge mode) based on the end of the number of precursor games. The pseudo-precursor mode is a mode in which the game ends without notifying the player a favorable result based on the end of the pseudo-precursor game number.

In step S2504, a table for pseudo precursor mode lottery is acquired from various table storage areas of ROM 83, and a lottery counter is acquired from various counter areas 84c, and a lottery is performed as to whether or not to execute the pseudo precursor mode. .. In the table for the pseudo precursor mode lottery, the probability of winning the pseudo precursor mode lottery is set to be different depending on the type of the specific winning combination. For example, the strong cherry is more pseudo than the weak cherry. It is set so that the probability of winning the lottery in the precursor mode is high.

In step S2505, it is determined whether or not the lottery in the pseudo precursor mode has been won based on the processing result of step S2504. If the game is won, the lottery process for the number of games in the pseudo precursor mode is performed in step S2506. This process corresponds to step S808 or the like on the main control device 101 side, and the number of pseudo precursor games of 1 out of 1 to 32 is randomly determined by lottery. In the following step S2507, a process of setting the number of pseudo precursor games determined in step S2506 in the continuous effect counter is performed. In the present embodiment, when the precursor mode or the pseudo precursor mode is set, the precursor mode or the pseudo precursor mode ends after the continuous effect is performed. Then, by inputting the number of pseudo precursor games to the continuous effect counter in step S2507, when the number of remaining games in the pseudo precursor mode corresponds to the start of continuous effect (remaining 4 games), continuous effect is started. It will be.

In step S2508, a process of setting a pseudo flag indicating that the pseudo precursor mode is set is executed in the various flag storage areas 84b. In the following step S2509, the continuous effect flag is set. After that, the process for notifying the specific combination is terminated. Further, if an affirmative determination is made in any of steps S2501 to S2503, or if a negative determination is made in step S2505, the specific combination notification process is terminated as it is.

<Continuous staging setting process>
Next, the continuous effect setting process performed in step S1909 of the start effect setting process (FIG. 44) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 53.

In step S2601, it is determined whether or not the precursor command is included as the start command received this time. When the precursor command is included, in step S2602, the process of inputting the precursor game number of the precursor mode included in the precursor command to the continuous effect counter is performed. As a result, when the number of remaining games in the precursor mode corresponds to the start of continuous production (remaining 4 games), continuous production is started. In the following step S2603, the continuous effect flag is set.

If a negative determination is made in step S2601, or after the process of step S2603 is executed, the process proceeds to step S2604. In step S2604, it is determined whether or not the continuous effect flag is set. If the continuous effect flag is set, the process of subtracting 1 from the continuous effect counter is performed in step S2605. Then, in step S2606, it is determined whether or not the continuous effect counter is a number (0 to 3) corresponding to the continuous effect. When the continuous effect counter is a number corresponding to the continuous effect, it is determined in step S2607 whether or not the pseudo flag is set. If the pseudo flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S2608, and the effect data table for this precursor is acquired from the effect data table storage area 83a of the ROM 83. Then, in step S2609, the effect data of the corresponding continuous effect is specified from the effect data table for this precursor and the continuous effect counter, and a process of setting as the continuous effect of this time is performed. As the production data of the continuous production specified from the production data table for this precursor, if the continuous production counter is 1 to 3, the continuous production is the production data indicating that the continuous production is continued until the next game. If the counter is 0, the effect data indicates that the continuous effect of this time ends with success.

If it is determined in step S2607 that the pseudo flag is set, the process proceeds to step S2610. In step S2610, the effect data table for pseudo precursors is acquired from the effect data table storage area 83a of the ROM 83. Then, in step S2611, the effect data of the corresponding continuous effect is specified from the effect data table for pseudo precursors and the continuous effect counter, and a process of setting as the continuous effect of this time is performed. As the staging data of the continuous staging specified from the staging data table for the pseudo precursor, if the continuous staging counter is 1 to 3, the staging data indicating that the staging is continued until the next game or the staging indicating that the staging is not continued. It is data, and if the continuous staging counter is 0, it is staging data indicating that the continuous staging this time ends with a failure.

The effect data specified from the pseudo precursor effect table when the continuous effect counters are 1 to 3 include those for which continuous effect is not set. For example, when the continuous effect counters are 3 and 2, the effect data of the continuous effect is not set, and when the continuous effect counter is 1, the continuous effect indicates that the continuous effect continues until the next game of FIG. 59 (a). When the staging data of the first staging game is set and the continuous staging counter is 0, the staging data of the second staging game indicating that the staging is not continued until the next game is set in FIG. 59 (b). By doing so, it is possible to set an effect in which the continuous effect is interrupted in the middle of the game in which the number of pseudo precursor games in the pseudo precursor mode is 0.

After performing the process of step S2609 or step S2611, it is determined in step S2612 whether or not the continuous effect counter is 0. When the continuous effect counter is 0, the process of clearing the continuous effect flag and the pseudo flag is performed in step S2613. If the pseudo flag is not set, that state is maintained. If a negative determination is made in step S2606 or step S2612, or after the process of step S2613 is performed, the continuous effect setting process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S2604 that the continuous effect flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S2614. In step S2614, it is determined whether or not the bonusing effect flag is set. If it is set, the subtraction process of the bonus middle effect counter is performed in step S2615. Specifically, a process of subtracting 1 from the effect counter during the bonus is performed. In the following step S2616, the effect data table for the bonus is acquired from the effect data table storage area 83a. Then, in step S2617, the effect data of the corresponding bonus effect is specified from the effect data table for the bonus and the effect counter during the bonus, and the process of setting as the effect during the bonus this time is performed. In step S2618, it is determined whether or not the effect counter during the bonus is 0. If the bonus effect counter is 0, the process of clearing the bonus effect flag is performed in step S2619. After that, the continuous effect setting process is terminated.

As described above, in the slot machine 10, the lottery process on the main control device 101 side is performed based on the insertion of the medal as a game medium and the start operation of the start lever 41, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are When the rotation is started, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped based on the stop operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the combination of the symbols stopped on the effective line corresponds to the result of the lottery process, it corresponds. In the configuration in which the privilege is given, a plurality of RT states having different probabilities of replay as a result of the lottery process are provided, and the RT state shifts when the corresponding promotion replay or fall replay wins. Whether or not the corresponding replay is won is determined by the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 in addition to the result of the winning / failing lottery, and the notification of the operation order is performed according to the result of the lottery process. It is done by winning the lottery. As a result of the lottery process, a push order bell is provided, and depending on the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, the push order bell winning can be established and a medal can be obtained. Then, by shifting to the second RT state or the third RT state as the gaming state in which the replay probability is improved, and by shifting to the display mode in which the operation order is notified, the push is performed in the RT state with the replay probability improved. It is possible to win a prize in the order bell, and it is possible to win a large number of medals.

<Production data setting process>
Next, the effect data setting process in the effect setting process (FIG. 42) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 60. In the effect data setting process, the effect set in each process of step S1701 to step S1710 is performed as a display effect on the display control device 201 (liquid crystal display device 65), and as a sound effect on the sound source IC85. It is a process to be performed.

That is, in step S2701, it is determined whether or not the effect is set in each of the processes of step S1701 to step S1710. More specifically, in the bet-time effect setting process of step S1704, the start-time effect setting process of step S1706, each stop operation effect setting process of step S1708, the all-stop effect setting process of step S1710, and other processes of step S1711. It is determined whether or not any of the various effect setting processes has been performed. When any of the effect setting processes is performed, the display data setting process is executed in step S2702. The display data setting process is a process for allowing the display control device 201 to perform a display effect. In the following step S2703, the sound data setting process is executed. The sound data setting process is a process for making a sound effect performed by the sound source IC85.

If a negative determination is made in step S2701, or after the process of step S2703 is executed, the effect data setting process is terminated.

Hereinafter, the display data setting process and the sound data setting process will be described.

<Display data setting process>
As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 61, in the display data setting process, first, in step S2801, the effect set in each process of steps S1701 to S1710 is grasped, and the address information corresponding to the grasped effect is specified. Execute the process. Specifically, the effect data table is acquired from the effect data table storage area 83a of the ROM 83, and the address information of the effect command corresponding to the effect set this time is specified.

As shown in FIG. 62, in the effect data table, the effect number (effect content), the effect command to the display control device 201, and the command address information indicating the storage location of the effect command are one-to-one. It is associated and stored. Therefore, by specifying the address information of the effect data table based on the effect content set this time, the effect command to be output to the display control device 201 is specified.

For example, when the challenge mode start effect (step S1802) is set in the bet time effect setting process, in step S2801, the effect number of the challenge mode start effect is grasped from the effect data table, and the effect number corresponds to the effect number. Specify the command address information to be used. When the continuous effect is set in the start effect setting process, in step S2801, the effect number of the continuous effect corresponding to the value of the continuous effect counter this time is grasped from the effect data table, and the effect number corresponds to the effect number. Specify the command address information to be used. Further, when the effect for the display mode is set by performing the display mode setting process in the effect setting process at the start, in step S2801, the effect number of the current display mode effect is grasped from the effect data table. Then, the command address information corresponding to the effect number is specified.

In the following step S2802, a process of acquiring an effect command is executed based on the address information specified in step S2801. Specifically, based on the command address information specified in step S2801, a process of acquiring an effect command from the corresponding address in the effect command storage area 83d of the ROM 83 is executed. Then, in step S2803, after outputting the effect command to the display control device 201, the present display data setting process is terminated.

That is, the display data setting process is executed at the timing when various effects are set as one of the periodic processes (effect setting process) started periodically (2 msec) by the sub control device 81, and the display data setting is performed. The effect command set in the process is also output to the display control device 201 at the timing when various effects are set in the periodic process.

<V interrupt processing of display control device 201>
Next, the V interrupt process executed by the CPU 202 in the display control device 201 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The V interrupt process is a process executed when the CPU 202 detects a V interrupt signal. The V interrupt signal is a signal transmitted by the VDP 205 to the CPU 202. When the VDP 205 outputs an image signal for one frame to the liquid crystal display device 65, the VDP 205 starts outputting the image signal from a dot in the upper left corner of the display screen and is lined up on a horizontal line including the dot at one end. The image signal is sequentially output to the dots, and the image signal is output to the dots from the left to the right in order from the top for each horizontal line. Then, the image signal is finally output to the dots in the lower right corner of the display screen. In this case, the VDP 205 outputs a V interrupt signal to the CPU 202 at the timing when the image signal is output for the last dot, and causes the CPU 202 to recognize that the update of the image of one frame is completed. The output cycle of this V interrupt signal is 1/30 sec (about 33.3 msec). In this respect, the V interrupt process can be considered to be started in synchronization with the reception of the V interrupt signal.

Here, in the CPU 202, in addition to the V interrupt processing, the main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on and the command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the sub control device 81 are executed. Although detailed description of these main processes and command interrupt processes will be omitted, the effect commands output from the sub-control device 81 are stored in the command storage area by the command interrupt processes.

In the V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 62, first, in step S2901, it is determined whether or not a new command is received. Specifically, whether or not the effect command is output from the sub-control device 81 by performing the effect command output process in the display data setting process and the effect command is stored in the command storage area by the command interrupt process. Is determined. If the effect command is stored, the data table selection process is executed in step S2902. The data table is a group of information in which processing necessary for displaying an image for one frame at each update timing is defined when a moving image corresponding to a received command is displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 65. be.

By the way, while the output of the effect command on the sub-control device 81 side is performed in a cycle of 2 msec, the V interrupt process is performed in a cycle of about 33.3 msec, and a plurality of V interrupt processes are performed in one cycle of V interrupt processing. A production command may be output. In this case, in step S2901 and step S2902, the presence / absence of a command is determined and the data table is selected for all the commands stored in the command storage area.

As shown in FIG. 62, an image data group corresponding to an effect command set on the sub-control device 81 side is set in the data table. For example, when the effect command C1 corresponding to the effect number 1 is received, the number of frames is p number (p is a natural number), and Da (1) to Da (p) are used as usage data. The data table to be selected is selected. Further, when the effect number Cx corresponding to the effect number x (x is a natural number) is received, the number of frames is s number (s is a natural number), and Dx (1) to Dx are used data. The data table in which (s) is used is selected.

If a negative determination is made in step S2901, or after the process of step S2902 is executed, the process proceeds to step S2903. In step S2903, the pointer update process is executed. In the pointer update process, the pointer information set in the data table is updated so as to advance by one frame. This makes it possible for the CPU 202 to grasp the processing required to display the image for one frame corresponding to the update timing this time.

In the following step S2904, task processing is executed. In the task processing, in order to display the image for one frame corresponding to the update timing this time, grasp the type of image data necessary for giving a drawing instruction to VDP205, and the parameters applied to the grasped image data. Perform the calculation.

After that, the drawing list output process is executed in step S2905, and then the V interrupt process is terminated. In the drawing list output processing, a drawing list for displaying an image for one frame corresponding to the update timing related to the current processing time is created, and the created drawing list is transmitted to the VDP 205. In this case, in the drawing list, the image data grasped in the immediately preceding task process is the drawing target in the video RAM 207, and the parameter information updated in the task process is also set. The VDP 205 reads necessary image data from the character ROM 206 according to this drawing list, and sets the frame buffer of the video RAM 207 with the above parameters applied to the read image data. As a result, drawing data for one frame is created. Then, the image signal is output to the liquid crystal display device 65 according to the created drawing data, so that an image for one frame is displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 65.

For example, in FIG. 62, the data table corresponding to the effect number 2 is selected, and the data of Db (q-5) is used and displayed as the F (q-5) th frame image. In this case, the pointer update process of step S2903 is performed, so that the number of the used data is updated so as to advance by one frame. Then, by the task processing in step S2904, the data of Db (q-4) is grasped, and the parameters to be applied to the grasped data are calculated. After that, the drawing list output process in step S2905 creates a drawing list for the data of Db (q-4) and sends it to the VDP 205. As a result, the F (q-4) th frame image is displayed on the display screen.

As described above, every time the V interrupt process is activated in the display control device 201 at a cycle of about 33.3 msec, the image on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 65 is updated by one frame. That is, the display effect set as the display data setting process in the effect data setting process of the sub control device 81 is updated in the display control device 201 (liquid crystal display device 65) at a cycle of about 33.3 msec.

<Sound data setting process>
Next, the sound data setting process executed in step S2703 in the effect data setting process (FIG. 60) of the sub control device 81 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 64. The sound data setting process is a process for performing the sound effect according to the display effect set in the immediately preceding display data setting process.

As described above, in the present embodiment, as the speaker device 64 for producing sound, a plurality of sound source ICs 85, amplifiers 86, and individual speakers 87 are provided, and each sound source IC85 has a corresponding amplifier 86 and individual speakers 87. Controls the generation and output of sound. The sound data setting process is a process for instructing the sound source IC85 of the sound data to be output in the current sound effect. Then, after the sound data is instructed to the sound source IC85 by the sound data setting process, the sound source IC85 generates and outputs the sound based on the instructed data.

The sound generation process in which the sound generation / output is updated by the sound source IC85 will be described in detail later, but the sound source IC85 performs the sound generation process in a cycle shorter than the update cycle for one frame in the display control device 201. It is configured to be performed in a certain 10 msec cycle. In this case, the update cycle for one frame on the display control device 201 side and the update cycle on the sound source IC85 side are in a relationship of a cycle having a length that is not divisible by each other, and the generation of the sound effect and the update timing of the display effect. There may be a gap between the two.

More specifically, for example, when a predetermined sound effect is to be started in the second frame of the effects for a predetermined frame, the start timing of the predetermined sound effect is set as the update timing of the sound source IC85. After about 33.3 msec, which is the update timing of the second frame, a deviation of about 3.3 msec (about 33.3 msec-10 msec × 3) from the update timing of the sound source IC85 will occur. Further, when the predetermined sound effect is to be started in the third frame of the effects for the predetermined frame, the start timing of the predetermined sound effect is set as the update timing of the sound source IC85, and the third frame is described above. After about 66.6 msec, which is the update timing of, there is a deviation of about 6.6 msec (about 66.6 msec-10 msec x 6) or about 3.4 msec (10 msec x 7-66.6 msec) from the update timing of the sound source IC85. It will occur.

That is, in the case of a configuration in which the sound effect is set by the update data for each sound generation process of the sound source IC85, even if the start timing of the sound effect is adjusted to the update timing of the frame, a deviation will occur. In this case, for example, the sound effect corresponding to the updated frame may be generated slightly later than the frame update timing, or the sound effect corresponding to the updated frame may be generated slightly earlier than the frame update timing. Will be done. Such a deviation may ruin the effect of the staging.

In particular, as described above, the present embodiment is a game that aims to acquire a large number of medals by shifting the display mode as well as shifting the gaming state, and is of great interest in the display effect performed by the liquid crystal display device 65. It can be said that they have been sent. In that respect, the content of the display effect is grasped by the sound effect prior to the display effect (for example, whether or not the lottery for transition to the attack mode is won is grasped by the sound effect before the display effect. If it is a configuration that may end up), not only can the effect of the key part of the game such as whether or not the display mode shifts cannot be fully expected, but also the effect of the key part will be ruined. Interest in playability in the present embodiment will be greatly reduced.

Therefore, in the sound data setting process in the present embodiment, a device is provided so as not to cause a discrepancy between the display effect and the sound effect.

As shown in FIG. 64, in the sound data setting process, first, in step S3001, a process of grasping the content of the current effect is executed. More specifically, as the content of this effect, a process of specifying the effect number specified in step S2801 of the display data setting process is executed. In the subsequent step S3002, a process of grasping the value of the sound source counter K stored in the various counter areas 84c of the RAM 84 is performed. The sound source counter K is a counter for specifying the type of the sound source IC 85 for setting the sound data in this processing. The value of the sound source counter K corresponds to the number of the sound source IC85, and in the processing after step S3003, the sound data setting processing is performed for the sound source IC85 corresponding to the sound source counter K grasped in step S3002.

That is, in step S3003, the sound effect data table stored in the effect data table storage area 83a of the ROM 83 is read out based on the effect number specified in step S3001, and the sound source IC 85 in this process generates sound. -Performs a process of specifying a frame (hereinafter referred to as a sound data generation frame) on the display control device 201 side to start output.

As shown in FIG. 65, in the sound effect data table, each sound source IC 85 and a sound data generation frame are stored in association with each other for each effect number. For example, in the production with the effect number 1, the sound data generation frame is set as the first frame for the first sound source IC85a to the 23rd sound source IC85w. Therefore, in the effect with the effect number 1, at the start timing of the display effect, the sound generation / output is started in all the sound source IC85s, and the sound effect is started in all the sound source IC85s. Further, in the production with the production number 2, the sound data generation frame is set as the first frame for the first sound source IC85a to the third sound source IC85c, while the sound data generation frame is set as the first frame, while the fourth sound source IC85d to the 23rd sound source IC85w are set. The sound data generation frame is not set. Therefore, in the production with the production number 2, the sound production is started by the first sound source IC85a to the third sound source IC85c at the start timing of the display production, and the other sound source ICs 85d to 85w are sounded in any frame. No production is done. That is, although the types and numbers of the sound source IC85s used in the first and second effects are different, the start timing of the sound effects is the same as the start timing of the display effects.

On the other hand, in the effect of the effect number 3, for example, the sound data generation frame is set as the first frame for the first sound source IC85a to the third sound source IC85c, and the sound data generation frame is the second frame for the fourth sound source IC85d. It is set as a frame, and for the fifth sound source IC85e, the sound data generation frame is set as the third frame. In addition, the sound data generation frame is set as the xth frame for the sixth sound source IC85f, and the sound data generation frame is set as the yth frame for the 21st sound source IC85v. Therefore, in the effect with the effect number 3, the sound effect by the first sound source IC85a to the third sound source IC85c is started at the start timing of the display effect, and the sound effect is started at the update timing of the next frame (update timing to the second frame). The sound effect by the 4 sound source IC85d is started, and the sound effect by the 5th sound source IC85e is started at the update timing (update timing to the third frame) of the next frame. Further, the sound effect by the sixth sound source IC85f is started at the update timing to the xth frame, and the sound effect by the 21st sound source IC85v is started at the update timing to the yth frame. That is, in the third effect, the start timing of the display effect and the start timing of the sound effect may be different.

In step S3003, for example, if the effect number of this time is 3 and the value of the sound source counter K is 1, it is grasped that the sound data generation frame is 1 for the first sound source IC85a. Further, for example, if the effect number of this time is 3 and the value of the sound source counter K is 4, it is grasped that the sound data generation frame is 2 for the 4th sound source IC85d.

After grasping the sound data generation frame in step S3003, the process of grasping the sound data address after the sound data generation frame is performed in step S3004. In the sound effect data table, a sound data number corresponding to the content of the sound effect to be performed after the sound data generation frame is stored for each sound source IC 85. For example, in the first production, for the first sound source IC85a, a sound production based on the sound data of the a is performed, then a sound production based on the sound data of the a + 1 is performed, and then a + 2, a + 3, and so on. , And so on, the sound data number is stored. Further, for the second sound source IC85b, a sound effect is performed based on the sound data of the bth, and then the sound data numbers such as b + 1, b + 2, b + 3, and so on are stored.

Each sound effect corresponding to each sound data number has a length of a predetermined period (for example, about 11.1 msec), and when the sound effect is performed by the first sound source IC85a in the first effect, the predetermined period. After the sound production of No. a is performed over a predetermined period, the sound production of a + 1 is continuously performed for a predetermined period, and then the sound production of a + 2 is performed over a predetermined period, and the sound of a + 3 is performed. Continuous sound generation / output is performed according to the set sound data number, such as production.

The sound data number is for associating with the address information of the sound source data stored in the sound source data storage area 83e of the ROM 83. The sound source data is data for generating and outputting sound by being reproduced by each sound source IC 85 in a sound generation process, and is data for reproducing music, voice, sound effects, and the like. As shown in FIG. 66A, a sound data table is stored in the sound data table storage area 83b of the ROM 83, and the sound data table contains a pair of sound data numbers and sound source data address information. It is stored in association with 1 in 1. Each sound source IC 85 acquires the corresponding sound source data from the sound source data storage area 83e shown in FIG. 66 (b) based on the sound source data address information, so that the corresponding sound effect can be produced by the amplifier 86 and the individual speaker 87. It becomes possible to do it through. That is, the sound data number is continuously set as described above, and the sound source data is associated with the sound data number and set, and the sound source IC 85 continuously acquires the sound source data for reproduction. However, the sound source data is reproduced (sound generation / output) in the acquired order.

Here, the sound source data storage area 83e stores volume information as well as sound source data. That is, in the sound source data storage area 83e, the output frequency and the like (pitch, sound type, etc.) as the sound source data and the output volume as the volume information are stored as a set. A value from 1 to 139 is set for the volume information, and the larger the value, the larger the output volume. When each sound source IC 85 acquires sound source data based on sound source data address information, volume information can also be acquired, and sound production is performed at a corresponding volume.

In step S3004, the sound data numbers after the sound data generation frame are acquired based on the sound effect data table, and the sound source data address information is grasped from the sound data table based on the acquired sound data numbers. ..

For example, in step S3004, if the effect number of this time is No. 3 and the value of the sound source counter K is 1, the first sound source IC85a is No. c, No. c, No. c, No. a, No. a, ... As sound source data address information corresponding to, information such as A (c), A (c), A (c), A (a), A (a), and the like is grasped. Further, if the production number of this time is No. 3 and the value of the sound source counter K is 4, the sound source corresponding to the d, d, d, d, d, and the fourth sound source IC85d. As the data address information, information such as A (d), A (d), A (d), A (d), A (d), and the like is grasped.

In the following step S3005, a process of grasping the number of frames up to the sound data generation frame is performed. For example, in the case of the first and second effects, the number of frames up to the sound data generation frame in each sound source IC 85 is 0. On the other hand, in the case of the third effect, the number of frames from the first sound source IC85a to the sound data generation frame in the third sound source IC85c is 0, but the number of frames up to the sound data generation frame in the fourth sound source IC85d is 0. The number of frames up to the sound data generation frame in the fifth sound source IC85e is 2, and the number of frames up to the sound data generation frame in the sixth sound source IC85f is x-1.

In the following step S3006, it is determined whether or not the number of frames grasped in step S3005 is a predetermined number (150 frames, 5 sec minutes in this embodiment) or more. If the number is less than the predetermined number, the process proceeds to step S3007.

In step S3007, a process of grasping the silent data address for the number of frames grasped in step S3005 is performed. As shown in FIG. 66A, silent data address information (B (x), B (y)) is set in the sound data table as the sound data address whose sound data number is x or y. Has been done. The silent data is data whose output frequency is equal to or less than the identification lower limit value (20 Hz) or equal to or higher than the identification upper limit value (20 kHz) as sound source data (20 kHz in this embodiment), and 0 is set as volume information. Is. The corresponding playback lengths of the x-th silent data and the y-th silent data are different, and the playback length of the x-th silent data is set as the length of one frame (about 33.3 msec). .. On the other hand, the reproduction length of the y-th silent data is a variable length, and the length is set in a later process (step S3011).

Here, when the sound source IC 85 performs sound effect by reproducing sound source data having a volume information of 1 or more, the player if the output frequency is sound source data of the identification lower limit value or more and the identification upper limit value or less is set. Can grasp the sound. On the other hand, even if the sound source data whose volume information is 0 or the sound source data whose output frequency is equal to or less than the identification lower limit value or equal to or more than the identification upper limit value is reproduced, the player can grasp the sound. Can not.

In other words, in the present embodiment, it is possible to set the sound data in which the sound source data for which the sound that can be grasped by the player is output is reproduced, and the sound that the player cannot grasp or is difficult to grasp is output. It is possible to set the sound data in which the sound source data is reproduced. The sound data (sound data) in which the sound source data that outputs the sound that can be grasped by the player is reproduced corresponds to the normal information as the sound information in the present embodiment, and cannot be grasped or is difficult for the player to grasp. The sound data (silent data) in which the sound source data from which the sound is output is reproduced corresponds to the special information as the sound information in the present embodiment.

In step S3007, as silent data corresponding to the number of frames up to the sound data generation frame, a process of grasping the address information in which the sound data number is x and the sound data address information is B (x) is performed. Specifically, for example, when the number of frames up to the sound data generation frame is 1, the B (x) for one frame is grasped as the sound data address information. When the number of frames is 3, B (x), B (x), and B (x) for 3 frames are grasped as sound data address information.

In order to distinguish between the sound data address information corresponding to the silent data and the sound data address information corresponding to the sound data different from the silent data, the former is referred to as a silent data address and the latter is also referred to as a sound data address. ..

In the following step S3008, the silent data address grasped in step S3007 and the sounded data address grasped in step S3004 are set in the area corresponding to the sound source counter K this time in the data output area 84a of the RAM 84. Perform processing. That is, in the data output area 84a, the first area to the 23rd area are set corresponding to the number of sound source ICs 85, and each sound source IC85 stores sound source data based on the data address set in the corresponding area. Sound source data and volume information are acquired from the area 83e.

For example, when the effect number of this time is 3 and the value of the sound source counter K is 4, B (x) and B (x) for 2 frames are grasped as silent data addresses, and sound data. A (e), A (e), A (e) ,,, are known as addresses. In this case, in step S3008, in the fourth area of the data output area 84a corresponding to the value of the sound source counter K, B (x), B (x), A (e), A (e), A (e). Set information such as ,,,. Further, when the effect number of this time is 3 and the value of the sound source counter K is 22, the silent data address is not grasped, and the sound data addresses are A (b), A (b), and A ( b) ,,, are known. In this case, in step S3008, information such as A (b), A (b), A (b), and the like is set in the 22nd area corresponding to the value of the sound source counter K in the data output area 84a.

If it is determined in step S3006 that the number of frames up to the sound data generation frame is a predetermined number or more, the process proceeds to step S3009. In step S3009, a process of specifying the update timing (processing timing) of the sound source IC 85 immediately before the sound data generation frame is performed. For example, when the sound data generation frame is the 182nd frame, the length of the period until the sound data generation frame is updated is 181 frames × about 33.3 msec = about 6.0333 sec. In this case, the update timing of the sound source IC 85 immediately before the sound data generation frame is the 6.030 sec from the update cycle (10 msec) of the sound source IC 85.

In step S3010, a process of specifying the length from the update timing of the sound source IC85 specified in step S3009 to the start timing of the sound data generation frame (about 3.3 msec in the above example) is performed. Then, in step S3011, a process of grasping the silent data address corresponding to the length specified in step S3010 is performed. That is, the silent data address B (y) corresponding to the y-th silent data whose length can be set is grasped by the length specified in step S3010 (about 3.3 msec).

In the following step S3012, the update timing information (start timing information) of the sound source IC85 immediately before the sound data generation frame specified in step S3010, the silent data address grasped in step S3011, and the silent data address grasped in step S3004 are grasped in step S3004. The processed sound data address is set in the area corresponding to the sound source counter K of this time in the data output area 84a of the RAM 84.

After executing the process of step S3008 or step S3012, the process proceeds to step S3013. In step S3013, a process of adding 1 to the sound source counter K is performed. Then, in step S3014, it is determined whether or not the sound source counter K has reached the upper limit value of 24. If it is 24, in step S3015, the process of resetting the value of the sound source counter K to the initial value of 1 is performed, and then the sound data setting process is terminated. As a result, in the next sound data setting process, the sound data setting process corresponding to the first sound source IC85a will be performed. If it is less than 24 in step S3014, it means that there is still a sound source IC85 that has not been set. In this case, the process of returning to step S3002 and repeating the process of setting the sound data of the corresponding sound source IC85 is repeated. ..

By the sound data setting process as described above, the address information of the sound data corresponding to the current effect is set in each area of the data output area 84a. Here, an example of the address information set in each area will be described with reference to FIG. 67. FIG. 67 shows a case where the effect number is 3.

For example, in the first area corresponding to the first sound source IC85a, A (c), A (c), A (c), A (a), A (a), A (a), A (b), Address information such as A (b), A (b) ,,, is stored. All of these address information are sound data addresses, and the first sound source IC85a performs a sound effect based on the sound data address from the start timing of the effect, that is, from the display start timing of the first frame in the display effect. conduct.

On the other hand, in the fourth area corresponding to the fourth sound source IC85d, B (x), A (d), A (d), A (d), A (d), A (d), A (d), Address information such as ,, is stored. As described above, B (x) is a silent data address having a length of one frame. Therefore, in the fourth sound source IC85d, sound is generated from the start timing of the effect, but one frame from the start timing is the generation of the sound based on the silent data, and the sound generated by the generation of the sound is produced by the player. It cannot be grasped or it is difficult to grasp. Therefore, although the sound generation by the fourth sound source IC85d is started from the display start timing of the first frame in the display effect, the player grasps as if the sound effect was started from the display start timing of the second frame. Will be done.

Similarly, address information such as B (x), B (x), A (e), A (e), A (e), etc. is stored in the fifth area corresponding to the fifth sound source IC85e. .. Therefore, although the fifth sound source IC85e starts the sound generation from the display start timing of the first frame in the display effect, the player perceives it as if the sound effect was started from the display start timing of the third frame. To.

In the sixth area corresponding to the sixth sound source IC85f, the sound generation start timing information is stored together with the address information such as B (y), A (c), A (c) A (c). In the sound source IC85, sound generation is started from such a start timing. Further, as described above, B (y) is a silent data address corresponding to the length of the start timing of the sound data generation frame and the update timing of the sound source IC 85 immediately before that. Therefore, although the sixth sound source IC85f starts the sound generation at a timing slightly earlier than the display start timing of the xth frame in the display effect, the player starts the sound effect from the display start timing of the xth frame. It is grasped as if it were.

<Sound generation processing by sound source IC85>
Next, the sound generation process executed by the sound source IC 85 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The sound generation process is a process individually executed by the first sound source IC85a to the 23rd sound source IC85w, and is based on the fact that new data is set in the data output area 84a by the sub control device 81. It is started and then executed in a predetermined predetermined cycle (10 msec cycle). That is, the sound generation process is a process that is started periodically, and the trigger for starting the cycle is the execution of the sound data setting process by the sub control device 81. If the sound data setting process is newly performed after the periodic sound generation process is started based on the sound data setting process, the update cycle of the sound generation process is reset. To. That is, when a new effect is generated, the sound generation process is started at a new cycle. Further, the start cycle of the sound generation process by the sound source IC 85 is longer than the start cycle (2 msec cycle) of the effect setting process by the sub control device 81, and the start cycle of the V interrupt process of the display control device 201 (33). It is a cycle shorter than .3 msec cycle).

Here, the sound source IC 85 is accessible to the RAM 84 in the sub control device 81, and more specifically, the data output area 84a of the RAM 84 is accessible. Therefore, when sound data setting processing is performed in the sub control device 81 and various data are set in the data output area 84a, the data is not output to the sound source IC 85 by a command or the like, but is set in that area. The state is maintained. That is, data can be exchanged between the sub control device 81 and the sound source IC 85 via the data output area 84a, and the processing configuration is simplified.

Further, the sound source IC 85 can also access the ROM 83 of the sub control device 81, and more specifically, the sound source data storage area 83e of the ROM 83 can be accessed. Therefore, it is not necessary to output the sound source data (and volume information) to the sound source IC85 by a command or the like when the sound source IC85 is used to produce the sound, and the sound source IC85 stores the sound source data (and volume information). There is no need. As a result, it is possible to dramatically simplify the processing configuration when performing sound information, and it is also possible to simplify the configuration itself of the sound source IC 85.

In step S3101, it is determined whether or not the start timing information is set in the data output area 84a. When the start timing information is set, in step S3102, it is determined whether or not the start timing of the sound generation process this time corresponds to the start timing information. If it is not the start timing, the sound generation process ends as it is. If the start timing information is not set in step S3101, or if it is determined in step S3102 that the start timing is reached, the process proceeds to step S3103.

In step S3103, a process of grasping the sound data address set in the data output area 84a is performed. In the following step S3104, a process of acquiring sound source data from the sound source data storage area 83e is executed based on the sound data address. In the following step S3105, a process of acquiring volume information from the sound source data storage area 83e is executed based on the sound data address.

After grasping the sound source data and the volume information in the present production set in the sound data setting process in step S3104 and step S3105, the process of grasping the set volume information is executed in step S3106. The process of step S3106 is a process of grasping the set values of the Vol switches 75 and 76 connected to the sub control device 81.

By the way, when the set values of the Vol switches 75 and 76 are changed or initialized, for example, the corresponding counter values of the various counter areas 84c of the RAM 84 are changed, and then the sound source IC 85 is used for the various counters. The counter value of the area 84c may be grasped, and the counter value may be grasped in step S3106. Further, when the set values of the Vol switches 75 and 76 are changed or initialized, the values may be output to the sound source IC 85. Further, the Vol switches 75 and 76 may be directly or indirectly connected to the sound source IC 85.

After that, in step S3107, sound generation control is performed via the amplifier 86 and the speaker 87 based on the sound source data acquired in step S3104 and the sound output amount grasped in steps S3105 and S3106. After executing the process of step S3107, the sound generation process is terminated.

Here, the difference between the sound source data when 0 is set as the volume information and the sound source data when 1 to 139 is set as the volume information will be supplementarily described with reference to FIG. 69. FIG. 69A shows the relationship between the sound source data when 0 is set as the volume information and the set value of each Vol switch, and FIG. 69B shows the values of 1 to 139 as the volume information. The relationship between the sound source data when a is set and the set value of each Vol switch is shown.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the first Vol switch 75 mainly for the manager of the game hall and the second Vol switch 76 mainly for the player are provided, and both Vol switches 75 and 76 are used. It is also possible to set the volume. The volume of the first Vol switch 75 can be set in 10 steps from 0 to 9, and the volume of the second Vol switch 76 can be set in 10 steps from 1 to 10. Regardless of the volume setting by any of the Vol switches 75 and 76, the larger the set value, the louder the sound will be output.

When the volume information is set to 0 as the sound data, as shown in FIG. 69 (a), the sound generation process is performed regardless of the volume setting of the first Vol switch 75 and the volume setting of the second Vol switch 76. However, the player cannot grasp the sound. That is, for the sound source data in which the volume information is set to 0, sound that cannot be grasped by the player is output regardless of the volume settings of both Vol switches 75 and 76. That is, no sound is output.

When the volume information is set as a as the sound source data, as shown in FIG. 69 (b), the set value of the volume setting of the first Vol switch 75 and the set value of the volume setting of the second Vol switch 76 are added. The sound of the set volume (in the figure, the value obtained by integrating both the set values and the output volume value of the sound data is shown) is output. However, when the volume setting of the first Vol switch 75 is 0, the sound output that the player cannot grasp is performed regardless of the volume information and the volume setting of the second Vol switch 76. That is, no sound is output.

The volume setting 0 of the first Vol switch 75 is used when the manager of the game hall or the like adjusts the game machine or the like. The reason why the volume setting 0 is not provided in the second Vol switch 76 while the volume setting 0 is provided in the first Vol switch 75 is that the fraudulent act performed so as not to intentionally generate the effect sound ( For example, it is to prevent the manager of the game hall from grasping the error sound, or to prevent the illegal bonus winning from being detected).

<Relationship between sound production and display production>
Next, the relationship between the frame update timing in the display effect, the update timing of the sound effect, and the length of the sound data will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 70.

When an effect trigger occurs and the display data (effect command) and sound data are set in the effect data setting process in the sub control device 81 at the timing of t1, the display control device 201 starts the frame from the timing of t1. The update of the sound generation process is started in the sound source IC85 from the timing of the t1.

As described above, the frame update cycle is 1/30 sec, which is about 33.3 msec. On the other hand, the update cycle of the sound generation process is 10 msec. The frame update cycle and the sound generation process update cycle are not divisible by natural numbers. Therefore, when the update of the frame and the sound generation process is started at the same time at the timing of t1, the update cycle of the frame and the update cycle of the sound generation process hardly match. For example, at the timing of t3, which is the update timing from the first frame to the second frame, there is a deviation of about 3.3 msec from the timing of t2, which is the update timing of the fourth sound generation process. Further, at the timing of t5, which is the update timing from the second frame to the third frame, there is a deviation of about 6.6 msec from the timing of t4, which is the update timing of the seventh sound generation process, and the eighth sound generation process is performed. There is a deviation of about 3.4 msec from the timing of t6, which is the update timing of. Therefore, even if you try to generate sound by the sound generation process so that the sound effect is started at the frame update timing, the sound effect may be started first or later by the difference in the update cycle. It ends up.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order to avoid such a deviation, the sound generation process based on the silent data is performed before the update timing of the frame (sound data generation frame) for starting the sound effect. There is. Specifically, for example, in the third sound source IC85c of FIG. 70 (e), the sound effect is started from the timing of t3, which is the update timing to the second frame. In this case, in the sound data setting process of the sub control device 81, the silent data and the sounded data are combined so that the sound generation process based on the silent data is performed from the timing of t1 which is the timing before the timing of the t3. Set as a set. Further, in the fourth sound source IC85d of FIG. 70 (f), the sound effect is started from the timing of t5, which is the update timing to the third frame. In this case, in the sound data setting process of the sub control device 81, the silent data and the sounded data are combined so that the sound generation process based on the silent data is performed from the timing of t1 which is the timing before the timing of the t5. Set as a set. By doing so, it is not necessary to perform sound generation processing so that the sound effect is started at the timing of t3 in the third sound source IC85c or the timing of t5 in the fourth sound source IC85d, and the timing of these t3 and t5. At the timing of, it is only necessary to continue the reproduction of the sound data that has started before that. As a result, it is possible to suitably avoid the occurrence of a discrepancy between the display effect and the sound effect.

The silent data set for the third sound source IC85c is reproduced data having a length of one frame from the timing of t1 to the timing of t3, and the silent data set for the fourth sound source IC85d is t5 from the timing of t1. It is regarded as the reproduction data of the length of two frames up to the timing of. In this way, by making it possible to set the silent data in frame units (natural number times the frame length), it is possible to simplify the processing configuration when setting the silent data. ..

In the relationship between the third sound source IC85c and the fourth sound source IC85d in which the silent data is set and the first sound source IC85a and the second sound source IC85b (FIGS. 70 (c) and 70 (d)) in which the silent data is not set, there is no sound. Regardless of whether or not the data is set, the sound data reproduction (sound generation by the sound generation process) is started from the start timing of the first frame for all the sound source ICs 85a to 85d. That is, it is not necessary for the sound source ICs 85a to 85d to monitor the sound reproduction start timing, and it is possible to avoid an increase in the processing load of the sound source ICs 85a to 85d.

Further, when comparing the amount of sound data of the first sound source IC85a in which the silent data is not set and the third sound source IC85c and the fourth sound source IC85d in which the silent data is set, all of them are for the length from t1 to t10 (x). The sound data is for frames), and the amount of data does not vary in each sound source IC 85a, 85c, 85d, and processing can be equalized.

On the other hand, for the second sound source IC85b that produces sound from the start of the first frame to the end of the second frame, only the sound data for two frames is set, and the sound data for the third and subsequent frames is not set. That is, when there is a period in which the sound effect is not performed and the sound effect is performed after that period as in the case of the third sound source IC85c and the fourth sound source IC85d, there is no sound in order to adjust the start timing of the sound effect. Although the data is set, even if there is a period in which the sound effect is not performed as in the second sound source IC85b, if the sound effect is not performed after that period, the start timing of the sound effect is adjusted. Do not set silent data because it is not necessary. By doing so, it is possible to avoid unnecessary data setting and reduce the amount of set data.

Regarding the relationship between the second sound source IC85b and the fourth sound source IC85d, the second sound source IC85b performs sound production by sound generation processing based on sound data over the first frame and the second frame, and the fourth sound source IC85d Does not produce sound by sound generation processing based on silent data for these first frame and second frame, while sound production is performed by sound generation processing based on sound data from the third frame to the xth frame. .. That is, the sound is produced by the second sound source IC85b from the first frame to the second frame, the sound is produced by the fourth sound source IC85d from the third frame to the xth frame, and the second sound source IC85b and the fourth sound source are produced. With the IC85d, a series of sound effects from the first frame to the xth frame will be performed. In this way, by configuring the series of sound effects to be performed by the plurality of sound source IC85s, even if the sound effects of the same length are performed, the configuration is realized by a single sound source IC85 (for example, the first sound source IC85a). Compared to the above, the output location and output direction of the sound are different, which makes the sound effect heavier, and in order to make such a configuration, the switching timing of the sound source IC85 (in the above example, the frame). It is possible to prevent interruptions and duplication of sounds at the update timing), and it is possible to suitably realize the series of sound effects.

The fifth sound source IC85e to the seventh sound source IC85g of FIGS. 70 (g) to 70 (i) show a pattern in which a series of sound effects as described above is realized by a plurality of sound source ICs 85. For example, the fifth sound source IC85e executes sound generation processing based on the sound data for the first frame as the first period, and the sixth sound source IC85f executes the sound generation process based on the sound data for the first frame as the first period. The generation process is executed, and the sound generation process based on the sound data for the second frame is executed as the second period. That is, the fifth sound source IC85e and the sixth sound source IC85f realize a series of sound effects over the first frame (fifth sound source IC85e) and the second frame (sixth sound source IC85f). Further, the seventh sound source IC 85g executes a sound generation process based on the silence data of the first frame as the first period and the second frame as the second period, and the third period is the third. Sound generation processing based on sound data for three frames is executed. That is, in addition to the 5th sound source IC85e and the 6th sound source IC85f, the 7th sound source IC85g causes the first frame (fifth sound source IC85e), the second frame (sixth sound source IC85f), and the third frame (seventh sound source IC85g). A series of sound productions are realized. In this way, by using silent data in a configuration in which sound is generated and output by a plurality of sound source IC85s, a series of sound effects in which the output location and output direction of the sound are different can be interrupted or duplicated. It is possible to realize it while preventing it from occurring.

In the above embodiment, when the number of frames up to the sound data generation frame is a predetermined number or more, the silent data from the timing of t1 is not set as in the eighth sound source IC85h of FIG. 70 (j). In this case, the update timing (t8) of the sound generation process immediately before the start timing (t9) of the sound data generation frame is specified, and the update timing is specified together with the update timing (start timing information) of the sound generation process. Sound data (silent data from t8 to t9) for the length from to the start timing of the sound data generation frame (xth frame) and sound data (t9 to t10) after the sound data generation frame. Sound data) and is set. In this way, when the sound generation processing based on the silence data can be performed over a too long period, the silence data to be set should be minimized instead of setting the silence data for the entire period. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the amount of set data.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

The display effect and the sound effect are set in the effect data setting process of the sub control device 81, and based on the setting, the display effect is performed by the display control device 201 and the sound effect is performed by the sound source IC85. In the above configuration, the update timing of the display effect on the display control device 201 side and the update timing of the sound effect on the sound source IC85 side are different, and these update cycles are not divisible by each other. In such a configuration, both update timings are not easily synchronized. For example, even if an attempt is made to start the sound effect at the update timing of the display effect, the difference between the update timing on the sound effect side causes a difference between the two effects. It ends up. Therefore, in the above configuration, the silent data is set before the update timing of the display effect, and the sound data is set from the update timing of the display effect, and the sound based on the silent data is set at the update timing on the sound effect side. It was configured to start playback of. By doing so, it is possible to start the sound effect based on the sound data at the update timing of the display effect while the difference between the update timings of both effects remains.

When setting silent data, the sound data generation frame on the display effect side was grasped, and the amount of silent data to be set and the setting method were different depending on the grasped result. More specifically, when the number of sound data generation frames is less than a predetermined number as in the first sound source IC85a to the seventh sound source IC85g in FIG. 70, silent data is set from the start frame (first frame). Like the eighth sound source IC85h in FIG. 70, when the number of frames is more than a predetermined number, the silent data from the update timing of the sound effect immediately before the sound data generation frame is set. In other words, if you try to set too long silent data, the amount of data to be set will increase, and although the amount of data is small, if you have to set the start timing information as well, the processing load may increase. .. By doing so, it is possible to maintain a balance between the amount of silent data to be set and the processing load.

When setting silent data from the start frame, the silent data can be set by the length of each frame. By doing so, it is possible to avoid a deviation from the display effect with a simple configuration without requiring special processing for matching the length of the silent data with the update cycle of the frame.

It has a plurality of sound source ICs 85, and in the sound data setting process of the sub control device 81, the sound data for each sound source IC85 is set, while each sound source IC85 can individually execute the sound generation process. By doing so, after the sound data setting processing is performed on the sub control device 81 side, the execution of the sound effect can be left to each sound source IC85, and a new effect is generated on the sub control device 81 side. It becomes possible to perform other processing and the like in preparation for.

In each effect, the plurality of sound source ICs 85 are set so that the sound data generation frames may be different from each other. Then, the sub-control device 81 is configured to set silent data for each sound data generation frame. By doing so, it becomes possible to play the effect of superimposing sound effect by the plurality of sound source IC85s by using a simple sound deviation prevention mechanism using silence data.

In a configuration in which sound generation processing is performed by a plurality of sound source IC85s, one sound source IC85 is subjected to sound generation processing based on sound data at a predetermined timing, and other sound source IC85s are sound based on silent data at the same predetermined timing. The sound data of each sound source IC85 can be set so that the generation process is performed. By doing so, it is possible to realize a continuous sound effect while overlapping the sounds produced by the sound source IC85 with each other.

The sound data including the silent data is set in the data output area 84a of the RAM 84, and each sound source IC 85 can access the data output area 84a. By doing so, it is not necessary to output a command or the like in order for the sub-control device 81 to issue a sound effect command to each sound source IC 85, and the processing configuration for exchanging information can be simplified. Information omission can be suppressed.

Further, the data output area 84a is configured to set the address information of the sound source data as the sound data, and the sound source IC 85 is configured to acquire the sound source data from the sound source data storage area 83e of the ROM 83 based on the address information. .. As a result, the raw data (sound source data) for reproduction is not set in the data output area 84a, so that the amount of information to be set can be significantly reduced. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load when setting the sound effect.

<Second embodiment>
In the first embodiment, the silent data is set as the sound data to be the sound generation process before the sound data, but in the present embodiment, the silent data is set after the sound data. FIG. 71 shows an example of a sound effect data table in the present embodiment.

In the present embodiment, in the production whose production number is p, the sound data generation frame is set as the first frame in any sound source IC85. Regarding the first sound source IC85a, the sound data numbers indicating the sound source data after the sound data generation frame are set to a, a, a, x, b, b, and b. As described above, when the sound data number is x, silence data (H (0)) having a length in frame units is set. That is, in the production of No. p, the first sound source IC85a performs sound generation processing based on the sound data of No. a from the first frame, then performs sound generation processing based on the silent data of No. x, and then b. Performs sound generation processing based on the sound data of the number.

In the production of p, the second sound source IC85b is set as x, c, c, c, and x as sound data numbers indicating sound source data after the sound data generation frame. That is, in the production of No. p, the second sound source IC85b performs sound generation processing based on the silent data of No. x from the first frame, then performs sound generation processing based on the sound data of No. c, and then x. Performs sound generation processing based on the silent data of the number. That is, in the present embodiment, even if the first frame is set as the sound data generation frame, the sound generation process based on the silent data may be performed from the first frame. In other words, depending on the number of substantial sound data generation frames (in the case of the second sound source IC85b, the second frame substantially corresponds to the second frame), the sound up to the substantial sound data generation frame. As the data number, the sound data number corresponding to the silent data is stored in advance.

In the production of No. p in FIG. 71, the third sound source IC85c shows a modified example of the second sound source IC85b. That is, in the second sound source IC85b, among the sound data numbers of x, c, c, c, and x, the sound data number of x after c is not stored, and the sound data number of c is not stored. After the sound generation processing based on the sound data corresponding to the sound data number is performed, the sound generation processing is not performed. Even in this case, the total amount of sound data for the first sound source IC85a and the total amount of sound data for the third sound source IC85c will be different, but the sound effect will be the same. It is possible to exert it.

In the production of No. p in FIG. 71, the fourth sound source IC85d shows a substantially modified example of the sound data generation frame. That is, in the present embodiment, the sound data generation frame is the first frame, while the sound data number corresponding to the sound data can be set in advance from the first frame, and the period (data amount) of the sound data is set. ) Is not limited to the first frame, and may be a period corresponding to the frame in which the sound generation processing based on the sound data is performed. In the fourth sound source IC85d, sound generation processing based on sound data (sound data of number c) is substantially performed from the third frame, but the period corresponding to the first frame and the second frame is x. The silent data of the number is set.

In the present embodiment, in the production whose production number is q, the length of the silent data set after the sound data is particularly different from the production of the p-number. For example, for the first sound source IC85a and the second sound source IC85b, the first frame is set as the sound data generation frame, and further, the sound data number corresponding to the sound data is set from the first frame. There is. Specifically, for the first sound source IC85a, the sound data numbers of a, a, a, a, a, y, b, b, and b are set. As described above, when the sound data number is y, silent data (H (0)) having a length shorter than the length in frame units is set. That is, in the production of the qth, the first sound source IC85a performs the sound generation processing based on the sound data of the ath from the first frame, and then performs the sound generation processing based on the silent data of the yth in the middle of the frame. After switching, the sound generation process based on the sound data of No. b is performed.

In the production of q, the sound data numbers of c + 1, c + 1, c + 1, b + 1, a, y, b, b, and b are set for the second sound source IC85b. As shown in FIG. 66, the sound data of c + 1, the sound data of b + 1, and the sound data of a are the same as the sound source data, but the volume information is different, and c + 1, b + 1, and a are different. The volume is set to gradually decrease in the order of. Therefore, in the production of the qth, the volume of the second sound source IC85b gradually decreases after performing the sound generation processing based on the sound data of the c + 1 from the first frame, and the silent data of the yth is in the middle of the frame. The sound generation process is switched to the sound generation process based on the above, and then the sound generation process based on the sound data of No. b is performed.

In the production of No. q, the first frame and the third frame are set as the sound data generation frames for the third sound source IC85c. As the sound data numbers, a, a, and a are set, and then b, b, and b are set after a blank period of data. In this case, in the sound data setting process (FIG. 64), the first frame and the third frame are grasped as the sound data generation frame in the process of grasping the sound data generation frame (step S3003). Then, in step S3006 in the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the number of frames is 0 or more as a determination of whether or not the number of frames is a predetermined number or more. That is, in step S3006 in this embodiment, a positive determination is always made. After that, in steps S3009 to S3012, silence data (y-th silence data) corresponding to the period until the update timing of the third sound source IC85c immediately before the update timing to the third frame is set, and the start timing is set. The update timing of the third sound source IC85c immediately before the above is set.

FIG. 72 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the frame update timing in the present embodiment, the update timing of the sound effect, and the length of the sound data.

When the display effect and the sound effect of the p number are started at the timing of t11, the sound generation by the sound generation process is started in any of the first sound source IC85a to the fourth sound source IC85d. In this case, the first sound source IC85a is the sound generation process based on the sound data, while the second sound source IC85b to the fourth sound source IC85d are all started the sound generation process based on the silent data.

At the timing of t12, which is the update timing from the first frame to the second frame, the sound data of the sound generation processing of the first sound source IC85a is switched from the sound data to the silent data. Therefore, the sound generated by the sound generation process of the first sound source IC85a (sound output from the first speaker 87a) is switched from a sound that can be grasped by the player to a sound that cannot be grasped (difficult to grasp). Further, at the same timing, the sound data of the sound generation processing of the second sound source IC85b and the third sound source IC85c is switched from the silent data to the sound data. Therefore, the sound generated by the sound generation processing of the second sound source IC85b and the third sound source IC85c (the sound output from the second speaker 87b and the third speaker 87c) is a sound that cannot be grasped (difficult to grasp) by the player. It switches to a sound that can be grasped from. As for the fourth sound source IC85d, since the silent data is inherited from the silent data, the sound is not switched at the same timing.

At the timing of t13, which is the update timing from the second frame to the third frame, the sound data of the sound generation processing of the first sound source IC85a and the fourth sound source IC85d is switched from the silent data to the sound data. Therefore, the sound generated by the sound generation processing of the first sound source IC85a and the fourth sound source IC85d (the sound output from the first speaker 87a and the fourth speaker 87d) is a sound that cannot be grasped (difficult to grasp) by the player. It switches to a sound that can be grasped from. Further, at the same timing, the sound data of the sound generation processing of the second sound source IC85b and the third sound source IC85c is switched from the sound data to the silent data, or the sound generation processing is completed. Therefore, the sound generated by the sound generation process of the second sound source IC85b (the sound output from the second speaker 87b) is switched from the sound that can be grasped by the player to the sound that cannot be grasped (difficult to grasp), and the first When the sound generation process of the 3 sound source IC85c is terminated (stopped), no sound is output from the third speaker 87c. Then, at the timing of t14 when the third frame ends, the production of the p-number ends.

When the display effect and the sound effect of No. q are started at the timing of t15, the sound generation by the sound generation process is started in any of the first sound source IC85a to the third sound source IC85c. Regarding the first sound source IC85a, sound generation processing is performed based on the sound data even after the timing of t16, which is the update timing from the first frame to the second frame, and the timing of t20, which is the update timing to the third frame, is higher. The sound generation process based on the silent data is switched to at the timing of t18, which is the previous timing and is in the display period of the second frame. Then, the sound generation process based on the sound data is switched again at the timing of t20, and the sound generation process based on the sound data is continued until the timing of t21.

The second sound source IC85b is the same as the first sound source IC85a in that the sound generation processing based on the sound data is performed at the switching timing (t18) from the start timing (t15) of the first frame to the silent data. However, the sound data (volume information) is set so that the volume gradually decreases. That is, at the timing of t16, the volume becomes smaller by one step than before, and at the timing of t17, the volume becomes smaller than before. Then, at the timing of t18, the process is switched to the sound generation process based on the silent data, and the player cannot completely hear the sound. After that, the point of switching to the sound data at the timing of t20 and the point that the sound generation processing based on the sound data is continued until the timing of t21 are the same as those of the first sound source IC85a.

Regarding the third sound source IC85c, the sound generation process based on the sound data is performed from the start of the first frame to the end of the first frame, but the sound generation process is temporarily terminated at the timing of t16 when the first frame ends. do. After that, the sound generation process based on the silent data is restarted from the timing of t19, which is the execution timing of the sound generation process immediately before the timing of t20, which is the update timing to the third frame. Then, at the timing of t20, the silent data is switched to the sound generation process based on the sound data, and the sound generation process based on the sound data is continued until the timing of t21.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

Silence data is set to be the target of sound generation processing after sound data. By doing so, it is possible to adjust the data amount and the reproduction length of the sound data set in each sound source IC 85 by the silent data. When silent data is set to be the target of sound generation processing before the sound data, the setting amount of the silent data is determined by the order of the sound data generation frames, while the target of the sound generation processing after the sound data. When the silent data is set so as to be, the set amount of the silent data is not specified by the sound data generation frame. Therefore, in order to adjust the total amount of data and the reproduction length, it is preferable to set the silent data after the sound data. In other words, it is possible to adjust the data amount and the reproduction length of the set sound data depending on whether or not the silent data is set after the sound data.

Further, since the silent data can be set after the sound data, a plurality of sound data generation frames can be set. That is, it is possible to set a plurality of start timings of the sound effect in one sound source IC85. In such a sound effect having a plurality of start timings, if the silent data is set to be sandwiched between the sound data and the sound data, each sound source IC 85 is based on the sound data without monitoring each start timing. The sound generation processing may be performed sequentially, and the processing configuration can be greatly simplified.

It is possible to set each sound data so that the switching timing between the sound data and the silent data in one sound source IC 85 and the switching timing between the sound data and the silent data in the other sound source IC 85 overlap. In a configuration where sound production is performed by a plurality of sound source IC85s, even if the start or end of sound production is controlled by on / off control of sound reproduction without using silent data, some control is performed due to the processing cycle. There is a possibility that it will shift. In particular, when one is turned off and the other is turned on, if the off control shifts first or the on control shifts later, a blank period of sound production occurs. On the contrary, if the off control is shifted later or the on control is shifted first, the sound effects are unintentionally overlapped. In that respect, in the above configuration, since silent data is used as an alternative to on / off control, the sound source IC85 does not need to grasp the timing at which the on / off control should be performed, but rather simply sets the sound data. It is sufficient to sequentially perform the sound generation processing based on the above, and it is possible to avoid the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience based on the on / off control.

<Third embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the presence or absence of setting of silent data differs depending on the type of staging. FIG. 73 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a type of effect that is continued over a plurality of games as an example of the type of effect.

Examples of the types of effects that are continued over a plurality of games include the effects in the bonus shown in FIG. 73 (a) and the effects in the attack mode shown in FIG. 73 (b).

As already explained, the bonus state is set to end with the payout of a predetermined number of medals, and is substantially carried out during the bonus depending on the winning probability of the winning combination in the bonus and the number of payouts of the winning combination. The number of games is a certain number of games (24 games). In the effect during the bonus, the effect content is set to be different for each game, and the corresponding effect is set according to the number of digested games in the bonus state (in the continuous effect setting process of FIG. 54, according to the effect counter during the bonus). The effect is set).

For example, in the staging during the bonus, the first game to the fifth game correspond to the opening staging, and the staging to congratulate the winning of the bonus (transition to the bonus state) continues for five games. Then, for the sixth game to the twelfth game, the winning BB-specific production is performed for each type (first BB or second BB) of the winning / transferred bonus. In the 13th to 19th games, the display mode at the time of winning is directed according to the display mode in the game in which the bonus is won. Then, as a special effect, the 20th game to the 23rd game notify, for example, whether or not the attack mode and the VB mode are simultaneously won. The 24th game corresponds to an ending effect, and the number of medals acquired during the bonus is displayed.

The effect during the bonus is updated at the start timing of each game, more specifically, at the operation timing of the start lever 41. That is, for example, at the timing when the sixth game is started in the situation where the opening effect is being performed, the opening effect is updated to the winning BB-specific effect, and the winning BB-specific effect is being performed. At the timing when the 13 games are started, the production will be updated according to the winning BB. Similarly, at the start timing of the 20th game, the effect according to the winning BB is updated to the effect according to the display mode at the time of winning, and at the start timing of the 19th game, the effect according to the display mode at the time of winning is updated to the special effect. Then, the ending effect is updated at the start timing of the 24th game.

As described above, the bonus medium effect is an effect in which, among the effects that continue over a plurality of games, an update to a new effect is performed at the time of the operation (start operation) for advancing the game. In other words, if the operation to advance the game that triggers the update to the new effect is not performed, the update to the new effect is not performed, for example, the operation to start the sixth game after finishing the fifth game. If is not performed, the player waits when the opening effect up to the fifth game is completed. More specifically, the display effect and the sound effect are not updated until the game start operation that triggers the update is performed. For example, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 65 still displays the frame at the end, and the speaker. The sound effect from the device 64 does not generate sound after the sound effect corresponding to the frame at the end is completed, and the effect becomes silent (overlapping with other effects). If so, the sound production can be performed). Alternatively, the display frame remains the frame at the end, and for the sound effect, for example, predetermined music is repeatedly played.

The effect in the attack mode is an effect set when the display mode shifts to the attack mode in the display mode setting process in step S1901. As shown in FIG. 73 (b), after the opening effect from the start, the first turn effect, the second turn effect, ..., the seventh turn effect is performed, and then the process returns to the first turn effect. The opening effect is performed over 15 sec, and each subsequent turn effect is switched to the next turn effect after 15 sec. That is, except for the opening effect, the first turn effect to the seventh turn effect are performed in 105 sec, and one lap is set as a loop effect of 105 sec. For each turn production, for example, in the first turn production, the front of the face of the main character (female character) is displayed up, and in the second turn production, the main character is seen from the left. The production is set, and the content of the production is set to be different for each turn, such as the production of the main character practicing serving volleyball in the third turn production.

In this case, in the effect during the attack mode, the update timing of each turn effect is performed according to the passage of time. For example, even if the player does not perform a game operation (start operation or stop operation) in the attack mode, the effect in the attack mode progresses with the passage of time.

In other words, the production in the attack mode is a production in which the production content progresses with the passage of time among the productions that continue over a plurality of games, and a new production is performed when the game is advanced (start operation). Is not updated, and once the setting is made, the effect continues until the transition to another display mode occurs.

The sound data setting process in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 74.

In the present embodiment, the process of grasping the content of the current effect is executed in step S3201. Such processing is the same as the processing in step S3001. In the following step S3202, it is determined whether or not the content of the effect grasped in step S3201 is a loop effect. Specifically, the production progresses based on the passage of time as in the attack mode production, instead of the production progressing based on the game operation as in the bonus production, and the production loops at a predetermined period cycle. It is determined whether or not the effect is to be performed. In the case of a loop effect, the process proceeds to step S3203 and a process of grasping the value of the sound source counter K is performed. The processing of steps S3203 to S3216 is the same as the processing of steps 3002 to S3015. That is, in the case of the loop effect, the process for preventing the sound deviation due to the setting of the silent data is performed as in the first and second embodiments.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3202 that it is not a loop effect, that is, if the effect this time is, for example, a bonus during effect, the process proceeds to step S3217. In step S3217, a process of grasping the value of the sound source counter K is performed to specify the sound source IC 85 to be processed this time. Such processing is the same as in step S3203 (step S3002). After that, in step S3218, the process of grasping the sound data generation frame is performed in the same manner as in step S3204 (step S3003), and in step S3219, the sound data generation frame and subsequent frames are present in the same manner as in step S3205 (step S3004). Performs processing to grasp the sound data address.

In the following step S3220, a process of specifying the sound source IC update timing immediately before the sound data generation frame is performed. Such processing is the same as the processing in step S3210 (step S3009). Then, in step S3221, the timing specified in step S3220 is used as the start timing information, and the start timing information and the sound data address information grasped in step S3219 are used in the data output area 84a this time. Performs the process of setting in the area corresponding to the sound source counter K. Then, in step S3222, an update process of adding 1 to the sound source counter K is performed, and in step S3223, it is determined whether or not the upper limit value (24) has been reached. If a negative determination is made in step S3223, the process returns to step S3217, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S3223, a process of resetting the sound source counter K to the initial value (1) is performed in step S3224, and then a sound data setting process is performed. To finish.

As described above, by setting the silence data at the time of the loop effect, it is possible to efficiently eliminate the deviation, especially when the deviation from the display effect is likely to occur.

In addition, while silent data is set during the loop effect, silent data is not set for the effect for which the update timing of the effect is set at the operation timing as the game progresses, so that the data for the silent data is set. It is possible to reduce the amount. That is, for loop effects that are prone to deviation, try to avoid the deviation, and even if the deviation occurs, if the effect is newly set by the subsequent game operation, there will be some deviation. Since the configuration is such that the generation is allowed and the reduction of the data setting amount is prioritized, it is possible to maintain a suitable balance between the effect and the processing load in performing various sound effects.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In each of the above embodiments, the deviation between the display effect and the sound effect has been described, but in the present embodiment, the difference between the other effects and the sound effect will be described. Here, as other effects, a reel rotation effect by controlling the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R will be described.

In the present embodiment, in the reel rotation effect, a specific effect is set in which a specific sound is generated at the timing when the predetermined symbol reaches a predetermined position. For example, as shown in FIG. 75, a specific sound is generated from the speaker device 64 at the timing when the 16th “red 7” symbol of the left reel 32L reaches the lower line L3 (lower stage) as the predetermined position. .. In this case, as long as the left reel 32L is rotating, the specific effect is continuously performed, and a specific sound is generated every time the 16th "red 7" symbol reaches the lower line L3.

Here, a supplementary explanation will be given regarding the rotation control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R.

As described above, each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is connected to a stepping motor, and the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is individually controlled by driving each stepping motor. The stepping motor is set to rotate once by giving a drive signal of 504 pulses, and the rotation position of the stepping motor, that is, the rotation position of the reel is controlled by this excitation pulse. The excitation pulse is output one pulse at a time in step S106 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) of the main controller 101. As the excitation pulse, one pulse is output in a cycle of 1.49 msec, which is the processing cycle of the timer interrupt process, and when each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is rotating at a constant speed, the rotation angle based on the drive signal of one pulse, that is, , The angle change for each process of the timer interrupt process is about 0.714 °. When each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is rotating at a constant speed, each reel 32L, 32M, 32R makes one rotation at 750.96 msec (1.49 × 504).

As described above, the update cycle of the sound data in the sound generation process of the sound source IC85 is 10 msec, and the update cycle for one round of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is not divisible by a natural number. Therefore, when trying to generate a specific sound in the update cycle of the sound generation process, a deviation of 0.96 msec per rotation may occur.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the specific effect of generating a specific sound each time the predetermined pattern reaches a predetermined position, the sound generation process based on the silent data is performed at a timing different from the timing of generating the specific sound. ..

FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing a specific effect processing in the present embodiment. This specific effect start process is a process performed when the rotation start process (step S402) of the reel control process (FIG. 18) is started in the main control device 101. For example, in the rotation effect processing (step S401), it is carried out when the special effect generation lottery is won.

In step S3301, a process of grasping the position of a predetermined symbol on the left reel 32L before the start of reel rotation is performed. Specifically, a process is performed to grasp the amount of deviation from the number 16 "Red 7" symbol, which is the target of the special effect, from the number of the symbol stopped at a predetermined position (lower line L3).

In the following step S3302, based on the effect set in the rotation start effect, a process of grasping the period required for constant speed rotation and grasping the period from the start of rotation until the predetermined symbol reaches the predetermined position is performed. Specifically, in consideration of acceleration processing at the start of rotation and the like, processing is performed to grasp the period from reaching constant speed rotation until the symbol targeted for the special effect reaches a predetermined position. In this case, for example, when a freeze effect accompanied by rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is set in the rotation start effect, the symbol that is the target of the special effect is set at a predetermined position in consideration of the period. The period until it is reached is grasped.

After that, in step S3303, a process for outputting a sound effect command including information of the period grasped in step S3302 to the sub control device 81 is performed, and then the process for special effect is terminated. The sub-control device 81 performs sound data setting processing based on the received sound effect command, and causes sound generation processing by each sound source IC 85 to generate a specific sound in the special effect.

In this case, in the sound data setting process, silent data is set in the period until the constant speed rotation is reached. Then, after reaching the constant speed rotation, the sound data having a length of 24 pulses (35.76 msec = 1.49 msec × 24 processing), which is one symbol when the predetermined symbol reaches the predetermined position, and 20 Silence data having a length of 480 pulses (715.2 msec), which is a symbol, is alternately set as a loop effect to be the target of sound generation processing.

FIG. 77 is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between the symbol position of the left reel 32L and the sound data in the special effect.

When the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is started at the timing of t22, the constant speed rotation is reached at the timing of t23 after the acceleration period. After that, at the timing of t24, the 16th "Red 7" symbol as a predetermined symbol reaches the lower line L3. The predetermined symbol passes through the lower line L3 by the timing of t25, and the next symbol (the 17th "watermelon" symbol) reaches the lower line L3 at the timing of the t25. Then, the predetermined symbol reaches the lower line L3 again at the timing of t26, which is the next arrival timing, and the next symbol reaches the lower line L3 at the timing of t27.

In this case, in the period from t22 to t24, silence data is set as sound data corresponding to the sound source IC85 (denoted as the nth sound source IC in the figure) that performs the sound effect in the special effect. Further, sound data is set in the period from t24 to t25, and silent data is set in the period from t25 to t26. Then, the sound data is set at the timings from t26 to t27, and after that, the sound data is set as a loop effect so that the sound data is set for each rotation cycle.

As described above, in order to perform sound production synchronized with the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, by setting silent data and sound data according to the rotation cycle, the update cycle on the sound production side and It is possible to suitably execute the sound effect synchronized with the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R without changing the control mode of the rotation control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R.

In particular, when the sound effect synchronized with the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is used as a so-called push assist that suggests that the predetermined pattern has reached a predetermined position, the sound effect and the rotation position of the reel are deviated from each other. In addition to the inconvenience that the degree of attention is reduced due to the deviation, the sound effect that is the index becomes meaningless in performing the eye-pressing based on the eye-pressing assistance. On the contrary, it causes a disadvantage to the player. However, if the mode of reel rotation control is adjusted to the sound production side in order to avoid such sound deviation, a mistake in pressing is induced due to the difference from the case where the pressing assist is not performed. Even if you try to produce a sound by anticipating that the predetermined pattern will reach a predetermined position without using silent data, you will be forced to change the update timing on the sound production side, and other major design changes will be made. It will be necessary. In that respect, if the silence data is used and synchronized with the rotation cycle as described above, it is possible to avoid the deviation with a simple configuration.

Further, as described above, the processing cycle of the rotation control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R depends on the processing cycle (1.49msec) of the timer interrupt processing of the main control device 101, but the processing cycle of the sound source IC85 (10msec). Are indivisible to each other, and are also indivisible to each other with the processing cycle (33.3 msec) of the display control device 201. That is, for example, even if the configuration is such that the processing cycle is synchronized without using silent data in order to synchronize the display effect and the sound effect as in the first to third embodiments, the present embodiment. As described above, if an attempt is made to add a synchronization effect between the effect on the main control device 101 side and the sound effect, it becomes necessary to further synchronize the processing cycles. In that respect, by using silent data as in the above configuration, it is possible to easily synchronize with the production of each processing cycle without changing any processing cycle.

<Other embodiments>
In addition, the present invention is not limited to the contents described in each of the above-described embodiments, and may be carried out as follows, for example. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be applied individually to each of the above embodiments, or may be partially or wholly combined and applied to each of the above embodiments. Further, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or a part of the various configurations shown in the above embodiments. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effect to be exerted) of each configuration to be combined is guaranteed. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration consisting of a combination of embodiments, or a part or all of them may be applied in combination.

(1) The sub-control device 81 sets the sound data for the sound source IC 85, and the sound source IC 85 performs the sound generation processing based on the sound data to realize the sound effect. May be able to control each amplifier 86 and individual speakers 87 based on the sound data.

(2) The processing cycle of V interrupt processing in the display control device 201, the processing cycle of sound generation processing in the sound source IC 85, and the processing cycle of timer interrupt processing by the main control device 101 are not limited to those described above. It suffices if these processing cycles are different from each other, and more specifically, if the relations are not divisible by each other, deviation is likely to occur, and thus the merit of applying each of the above inventions can be obtained.

(3) In the sound data setting process, all the sound data for each sound source IC 85 is set, but the sound source IC 85 of the sound data to be set may be different depending on the effect content. For example, in the case of the first effect, the sound data for the first sound source IC85a to the tenth sound source IC85j is set, and in the case of the second effect, the sound data for the eleventh sound source IC85k to the twentieth sound source IC85t is set.
In the case of the third effect, the sound data for the first sound source IC85a to the fifteenth sound source IC85о may be set so that the sound source IC85 set according to the effect content does not overlap, or the sound source IC85 set according to the effect content may occur. May be duplicated. In these cases, it is preferable that the sound data generation frame of each sound source IC85 is set to be different, and the presence / absence of setting of silence data, the length of silence data to be set, the start timing information, etc. are different depending on the sound source IC85. It is good to set it to. Further, for example, the 21st sound source IC85u to the 23rd sound source IC85w may not be used in a normal state, and may be used as a substitute when an inconvenience (failure or the like) occurs in another sound source IC85.

(4) In the sound data setting process, the sound data of each sound source IC85 is set, but the sound source IC85 that sets the sound data based on the sound data generation frame and the sound data are set in this process. It may be different from the sound source IC85 that does not. That is, for example, for the sound source IC85 in which the number of sound data generation frames is a predetermined number or more, the sound data may not be set in this processing. In this case, the sub-control device 81 temporarily stores the timing corresponding to the sound data generation frame for the sound source IC 85, and sets the sound data for the sound source IC 85 at a timing before the timing. good. By doing so, the sound source IC 85 does not need to determine the start timing of the sound source IC 85 for which the sound data is set after that. Further, by doing so, it is possible to set the sound data of each sound source IC 85 at different timings, and it is possible to avoid a temporary increase in the processing load by decentralizing the setting processing.

(5) Whether or not the silent data is set may be different depending on the content of the sound data generation frame in the display effect. For example, as a sound data generation frame, if the difference from the frame immediately before it (for example, color tone, presence / absence of character, character operation, brightness, etc.) is equal to or more than a predetermined value, silence data is set, and immediately before that. If the difference from the frame is less than a predetermined value, the silent data may not be set. It is thought that the larger the difference from the frame immediately before the frame, the easier it is to notice the difference between the sound effect and the display effect. It is also possible to reduce the amount of set data by allowing the deviation without using silent data for the production in which the deviation is hard to be noticed.

(6) It may be configured so that whether or not the silence data is set differs depending on the content of the sound effect. For example, the silence data may be set for the effect of starting the sound effect when the volume information is equal to or more than the predetermined value, and the silence data may not be set for the effect of starting the sound effect when the volume information is less than the predetermined value. This is because it is considered that the louder the volume, the easier it is to notice the difference between the sound effect and the display effect.

In addition, there is no sound data by the effect of starting the sound effect with the sound source data of the frequency band that is easy for the player to recognize, and the effect of starting the sound effect with the sound source data of the frequency band that is harder for the player to recognize than that frequency band. The presence or absence of the setting may be different, and the silent data may be set for the effect of the frequency band that is easy to recognize, and the silent data may not be set for the effect of the frequency band that is difficult to recognize.

(7) The silent data is sound data whose generated sound cannot be grasped or is difficult to grasp regardless of the set values of the Vol switches 75 and 76, but at least the second Vol switch 76 for the operation of the player. Regardless of the set value, the sound data may be any sound data that the player cannot grasp or is difficult to grasp, and depending on the set value of the first Vol switch 75 for the manager of the game hall, the generated sound can be grasped. It may be configured.

(8) The silent data is stored in advance with a length in frame units or a length corresponding to the amount of deviation between the sound data generation frame and the sound generation process, but the length of the silent data to be stored. Is not limited to the above, and may have other lengths. Further, instead of or in addition to the configuration in which silent data having a length of a predetermined period is stored in advance, a configuration in which the length can be changed each time may be used. For example, when the number of frames up to the sound data generation frame is grasped, it may be possible to create silent data having a length corresponding to the number of frames each time, or the amount of deviation between the sound data generation frame and the sound generation process. When the above is grasped, it may be possible to create silent data having a length corresponding to the amount of deviation each time. Further, for example, silence data having a length of a specific period (for example, 0.01 msec), which is a relatively short period, is stored in advance, and the silence data having a length of the specific period is stored according to the grasped length. The silent data may be set so that the reproduction is repeated. In this case, it is advisable to set the length of the specific period so that the frame length (about 33.3 msec) and the amount of deviation can be divided by a natural number in the specific period.

(9) In the sound data setting process, the sound data generation frame is specified and then the sound data and the sound data are set. A data set having a predetermined reproduction (generation) order may be prepared. More specifically, for example, for the first effect, the sound generation process based on the silent data is performed over the first period, and then the sound generation process based on the sound data is performed over the second period. The first data set of the silent data and the sounded data is stored in advance, and for the second effect, the sound generation process based on the silent data is performed over the third period, and then the sounded data. A second dataset of silent data and sounded data is stored in advance so that the sound generation process based on the above can be performed over the fourth period. Then, in the sound data setting process for the first effect, the first data set is read out and the data set is set in the data output area 84a, and in the sound data setting process for the second effect, the second data set is set. The data set is read out and the data set is set in the data output area 84a. By doing so, it is not necessary to specify the sound data generation frame for each effect, and the processing when the effect is generated can be simplified. It should be noted that each of the above datasets also includes not only a pattern in which sound generation processing is performed on sound data after silent data, but also a pattern in which sound generation processing is performed on sound data after sound data. Alternatively, a repeating pattern of silent data and sounded data may be included.

(10) In the sound data setting process, the address information of the sound data is set in the data output area 84a, but the sound source data itself may be set. By doing so, in the sound generation process of each sound source IC85, it is not necessary to perform the process of acquiring the sound source data based on the address information, and only the sound source data of the data output area 84a is read (reproduced). The processing on the sound source IC85 side can be simplified.

(11) Although the sound data is exchanged between the sub control device 81 and the sound source IC 85 via the data output area 84a, the sound data may be exchanged by using a command or the like. Specifically, in the sound data setting process, a command including sound data (address information) and sound source data set in the data output area 84a is output to the sound source IC85, and the sound source IC85 performs sound generation processing based on the command. It may be configured to perform. In this case, instead of the configuration in which the sub control device 81 and the sound source IC 85 are capable of bidirectional communication, a configuration in which the sub control device 81 can be unidirectionally communicated with the sound source IC 85 (bidirectional communication is not possible) may be used.

(12) Bidirectional communication is not possible between the display control device 201 and the sub control device 81, and unidirectional communication is possible from the sub control device 81 to the display control device 201, but bidirectional communication is possible. It may be configured as such. In this case, the update timing (processing timing of V interrupt processing) from the display control device 201 to the sound data generation frame is output to the sub control device 81, and the sound source IC 85 is set in accordance with the update timing of the sound data generation frame. It may be configured to start the sound generation process at. Even in this case, for example, in the case of an effect in which a plurality of sound data generation frames exist, if the sound generation process based on the sound data is performed before the sound data generation frame on the rear side, the previous sound is present. After the display control device 201 outputs the update timing to the sound data generation frame to the sub control device 81 and starts the sound generation process at that timing, it is sufficient to repeat the sound generation process on the sound source IC85 side. Since it is not necessary to output the information from the display control device 201 to the sub control device 81 at the time of the later sound data generation frame, the processing can be simplified.

(13) As the silent data, the sound data in which the sound that is difficult or cannot be grasped by the player is output from the corresponding individual speaker 87 by the sound generation processing is set, but the player is set from the individual speaker 87. Although the sound that can be grasped is output, the sound data may be set so that the sound that is difficult to grasp or cannot be grasped due to the interference with the sound output from another individual speaker 87 is output. That is, the sound data set for the first sound source IC85 is referred to as the first sound data, and the sound data set for the second sound source IC85 is referred to as the second sound data. In this case, the first sound that can be output by the sound generation process based on the first sound data and the second sound output by the sound generation process based on the second sound data are both sounds that can be grasped by the player. Although the first sound data and the second sound data are set so as to be, for example, the first sound and the second sound are set to sounds having opposite phases, and the sounds of each other (at least). One sound) is drowned out. Then, the first sound data is set in the first sound source IC85 and the second sound data is set in the second sound source IC85 so that the sound generation processing of the first sound data and the second sound data is performed at the same time. The configuration is to be used. Even in this way, if the sound generation process of the third sound that can be grasped by the player is performed following the first sound and the second sound, the output start timing of the third sound is set to the sound generation process. It is possible to set it independently of the update timing of.

(14) The first sound source IC85a to the 23rd sound source IC85w may be classified according to the effect and use, and the sound source IC85 for setting the sound data may be different depending on the effect and use. For example, the sound effect performed together with the display effect is configured to be performed by the first sound source IC85a to the tenth sound source IC85j, and the sound effect is performed by the rotation effect of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and the sound effect is performed by the eleventh sound source IC85k to 20th. The configuration is such that the sound source IC85t is used, and the sound effect for error notification is performed by the 21st sound source IC85u to the 23rd sound source ICw. Then, in the sound data setting process, the sound data for the corresponding sound source IC85 is set, but the sound data for the uncorresponding sound source IC85 is not set. By doing so, it is not necessary to set the sound data even for the unused sound source IC85, and the processing can be simplified.

(15) Although the sub control device 81 is configured to control each sound source IC 85, the display control device 201 may be configured to control each sound source IC 85, or the main control device 101 may be configured to control each sound source IC 85. good. Further, each sound source IC 85 may be connected to each of the control devices 81, 101, 201, and the sound source IC 85 controlled by the control devices 81, 101, 201 may be different.

(16) The sound source IC85 is configured to start the sound generation process based on a predetermined effect trigger, but the sound source IC85 is configured to always execute the sound generation process based on the silent data, and the predetermined effect trigger is set. When it occurs, the sound data as the original data of the sound generation process being executed may be rewritten. Specifically, the sound source IC 85 is configured to repeatedly perform sound generation processing at a predetermined cycle (10 msec), for example, after the power is turned on. If it is not the execution timing of the effect, the address information of the sound data that is the source of the sound generation process is the address information of the silent data. That is, the state in which the sound is output based on the silent data is the standby state. Then, when a predetermined effect trigger occurs, the address information of the silent data set in the data output area 84a in the sound data setting process of the sub control device 81 is changed to the address of the sound data corresponding to the current effect. It is configured to be rewritten into information. By doing so, in the sound source IC85, it is sufficient to simply repeat the sound generation process (sound output), and it is possible to simplify the configuration of the sound source IC85.

(17) The effect performed together with the sound effect is not limited to the display effect and the rotation effect of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and may be, for example, an operation effect using an accessory capable of a predetermined operation, or an LED. It may be a light emitting effect using a light emitting unit such as. As an operation effect, for example, by driving and controlling a predetermined drive unit, the accessory can be displaced to the first position and the second position, and the accessory is displaced from the first position to the second position at a predetermined timing. Set the production. Then, a sound effect is performed so that a predetermined sound is generated at the timing of displacement to the second position. In such a configuration, if the deviation that may occur due to the relationship between the drive cycle of the drive control of the predetermined drive unit and the update cycle of the sound generation process is compensated by the silent data, the timing of displacement to the second position It is possible to match the timing at which a predetermined sound is generated.

(18) In the configuration in which the sound effect and the rotation effect of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R are performed together, the sound generation process based on the silent data is performed except for the timing when the predetermined pattern reaches the predetermined position. For example, sound generation processing may be performed based on sound data in which the set value of the volume information gradually increases so that the volume increases as it approaches a predetermined position, or the volume decreases as the distance from the predetermined position increases. Therefore, the sound generation process based on the sound data in which the set value of the volume information gradually decreases may be performed. In these cases, it suffices if the sound generation process based on the silent data is performed at least at any timing when the predetermined pattern does not reach the predetermined position. That is, regardless of the length of the silence data, the deviation between the rotation cycle of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R and the generation cycle of the specific sound may be compensated by the silence data.

(19) In the configuration in which the sound effect and the rotation effect of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R are combined, a specific sound is generated during the constant speed rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. The rotation may be synchronized with the sound effect during the period up to that point (during the acceleration period). Specifically, it may be configured to synchronize with the sound effect in the freeze effect in which the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are rotated at a low speed during the operation invalid period of the stop switches 42 to 44.

(20) When an effect command is output in the display data setting process in the effect data setting process on the sub control device 81 side, the display control device 201 starts updating the frame at the subsequent update timing of the V interrupt process. Therefore, it is possible that the start timing of the display effect and the sound effect may be different. Therefore, for example, the V interrupt processing of the display control device 201 may be started based on the reception of the effect command (similar to the sound generation processing on the sound source IC85 side), or the display control device 201 and the sub control device 81. After enabling bidirectional communication, the execution timing (execution status) of the V interrupt process on the display control device 201 side is grasped in the effect data setting process of the sub control device 81, and based on the grasped result, It may be configured to output an effect command and perform sound data setting processing.

(21) In the sound data setting process of the sub control device 81, the address information of each sound data number corresponding to the effect number is set in the data output area 84a, and in the sound generation process of the sound source IC85, the address information is used as the address information. Based on this, the sound source data is individually acquired, and the sound is generated by connecting the sound source data having a predetermined playback length. However, the sound source data having the playback length of the entire effect corresponding to the effect number is stored. However, the sound may be generated by reading out the sound source data having the reproduction length of the entire effect.

(22) In the sound data setting process, whether to set the silent data in frame units or to set the silent data by grasping the amount of deviation is configured to be different depending on the number of frames up to the sound data generation frame. The number of such frames is not limited to the above (150). Further, the configuration may be different depending on the content of the effect, regardless of the number of frames up to the sound data generation frame, or in addition to the number of frames up to the sound data generation frame.

(23) If the sound data generation frame is after 1/3 sec, which is the common divisor between the update cycle of the sound generation process of the sound source IC85 and the update cycle of the V interrupt process of the display control device 201, the common divisor is the common divisor. The sound generation process using silent data may be performed on a frame-by-frame basis from an update cycle that is several times more natural.

(24) In the sound data setting process, it was different whether to set the silent data by the length of the frame unit or to set the silent data by the length corresponding to the deviation amount, but the length and the deviation amount of the frame unit were different. It may be possible to set silent data having a length including the corresponding length.

(25) As a loop effect, an example of the effect in the attack mode is shown, in which the first turn effect to the seventh turn effect are performed, and then the first turn effect to the seventh turn effect are performed again. It is not necessary to loop, it is sufficient if a part of it is looped. For example, the configuration may be such that the first turn effect is performed, the seventh turn effect is performed, then the first turn effect is performed, the sixth turn effect is performed, and then the first turn effect is returned. Further, the looped portion may be different for each loop. For example, the first turn effect to the seventh turn effect may be performed, then the first turn effect to the sixth turn effect, and then the second turn effect to the seventh turn effect.

(26) In a configuration in which silent data is set as sound data for each sound source IC85 to match the reproduction length of the sound data for each sound source IC85, the silent data is set after all the sounded data. May be good. For example, for the first sound source IC85a, the reproduction of the sound data ends at the first timing, and for the second sound source IC85b, the reproduction of the sound data ends at the second timing after the first timing. By setting the silent data for the first timing to the second timing as the sound data of the first sound source IC85a, the sound reproduction end timings of the first sound source IC85a and the second sound source IC85b are matched. Can be done. In this case, the second sound source IC85b may also be configured to set the silence data for the timing after the second timing, and the silence data for that amount may be set for the first sound source IC85a as well. Further, in addition to the above, when the reproduction of the sound data of the third sound source IC85c ends at the third timing after the second timing, the sound data of the first sound source IC85a is the third from the first timing. By setting the sound data for the minutes up to the timing of, and setting the sound data for the minutes from the second timing to the third timing as the sound data of the second sound source IC85c, the first sound source IC85a to the third sound source It is possible to match the reproduction end timing of the sound of the IC85c.

(27) A slot machine having three reels and three corresponding stop switches in parallel has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and for example, five reels and corresponding stop switches are provided in parallel. It may be a slot machine. From the viewpoint of suppressing erroneous operation in the reel stop operation, at least two reels and corresponding stop switches are sufficient. Further, the slot machine in which the effective line is set to one line in the situation where the number of bets is three has been described, but the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, and for example, the effective line may be five lines.

(28) Although a specific example of the slot machine 10 has been shown, it may be applied to a gaming machine in which a slot machine and a pachinko machine are fused. That is, among the slot machines, instead of the medal insertion and medal payout functions, a gaming machine having ball throwing and ball payout functions such as a pachinko machine may be used. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a game value in the game hall, which is a game value seen in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. It is possible to solve problems such as the burden on equipment and restrictions on the location of gaming machines due to the separate handling of medals and balls.

In addition, pachinko machines of the type in which a game ball is fired into the game area and a big hit lottery is performed based on the game ball winning at the start winning opening, and when the game ball enters a specific area of a special device, an electric accessory is released. A type of pachinko machine that opens a predetermined number of times, a type of pachinko machine that gives a big hit when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, a pachinko machine equipped with other accessories, an arrange ball machine, a sparrow ball, etc. The present invention can also be applied to the gaming machines of.

<About the invention group extracted from each of the above embodiments>
Hereinafter, the characteristic configurations extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described while showing the effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for the sake of easy understanding, the corresponding configurations in the above-described embodiment are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in the parentheses or the like.

The invention shown in each of the following feature groups is "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, or the like is known as a kind of gaming machine. In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is performed based on the establishment of predetermined lottery conditions. However, it is known that a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, for a slot machine, a start lever is operated in a situation where a medal as a game medium is bet. Then, the internal lottery is carried out, the rotation of the reel is started, and if the stop switch is operated during the rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped. And the stop result of the reel is the internal lottery. If it corresponds to the result of the above, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). In this type of gaming machine, it corresponds to the result of the internal lottery and the like. Regarding the background technology that "a sound effect may be performed by a sound generation means such as a speaker" as a kind of effect, "Here, in the gaming machine exemplified above, it is required to optimize the effect, for example. There is still room for improvement in sound production. ”This invention was made with the problem to be solved.

<Characteristic A group>
Features A1. A function and display for executing display data setting processing by a predetermined effect means (sub-control device 81) for executing a predetermined effect by a predetermined effect means (liquid crystal display device 65) based on the occurrence of a predetermined effect trigger. Function to execute V interrupt processing by the control device 201) and
A sound effect means (sub) that executes a sound effect corresponding to the predetermined effect by the predetermined effect means by a sound generated by a predetermined sound generation means (sound source IC 85, an amplifier 86, a speaker device 64 including an individual speaker 87). A function to execute the sound data setting process by the control device 81, a function to execute the sound generation process by the sound source IC85), and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
A first update means (a function of executing V interrupt processing by the display control device 201) capable of executing the update process of the predetermined effect by the predetermined effect means in the first cycle (about 33.3 msec), and
A second update means (a function of executing sound generation processing by the sound source IC85) capable of executing sound generation control by the sound generation means in a second cycle (10 msec) different from the first cycle, and
Equipped with
The sound producing means is
It is provided with a setting means (a function of executing a sound data setting process by the sub control device 81) for setting the sound information (sound data) of the sound effect corresponding to the predetermined effect by the predetermined effect means.
The sound generation means sequentially generates the sound of the sound effect based on the sound information set by the setting means.
The setting means uses the sound generating means corresponding to the special information (silence data) as the sound information, which makes it difficult or impossible for the player to grasp the sound generated by the sound generating means. A gaming machine characterized in that sound generation can be set to be performed at least one before and after a predetermined update timing in the first cycle.

In a gaming machine in which the predetermined effect in which the update process is performed in the first cycle is executed together with the sound effect in which the sound is generated in the second cycle, the predetermined effect and the sound effect are executed separately, so that the processing is distributed. On the other hand, there is a high possibility that there will be a discrepancy between the update timing of the predetermined effect and the timing of sound generation in the sound effect due to the difference in the period. If such a deviation occurs, not only the effect of the predetermined production and the sound production cannot be fully expected, but also the deviation causes the player to awaken and lowers the degree of attention. Can be. In that respect, in the above configuration, the sounds before or after the update timing of the first cycle are set so as to be difficult or impossible for the player to grasp. By doing so, it is possible to switch between sound and silence at the update timing of the predetermined effect, and it is possible to match the update timing of the predetermined effect with the start or end timing of the sound effect. This makes it possible to suitably perform the sound effect.

In addition, "special information that makes it difficult or impossible for the player to grasp the sound generated by the sound generating means" means "the sound generated by the sound generating means is difficult or unidentifiable by the player". It may be expressed as "special information that does not generate sound" or "special information that does not generate sound by the sound generating means".

Further, the "sound generating means" may be referred to as a "sound output means". In this case, the "special information" may be expressed as "special information in which the sound output by the sound output means is difficult or impossible for the player to grasp" or the like.

Further, "at least one before and after the predetermined update timing in the first cycle" may be expressed as "at least one immediately before and after the predetermined update timing in the first cycle".

Feature A2. A function and display for executing display data setting processing by a predetermined effect means (sub-control device 81) for executing a predetermined effect by a predetermined effect means (liquid crystal display device 65) based on the occurrence of a predetermined effect trigger. Function to execute V interrupt processing by the control device 201) and
A sound effect means (sub) that executes a sound effect corresponding to the predetermined effect by the predetermined effect means by a sound generated by a predetermined sound generation means (sound source IC 85, an amplifier 86, a speaker device 64 including an individual speaker 87). A function to execute the sound data setting process by the control device 81, a function to execute the sound generation process by the sound source IC85), and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
A first update means (a function of executing V interrupt processing by the display control device 201) capable of executing the update process of the predetermined effect by the predetermined effect means in the first cycle (about 33.3 msec), and
A second updating means (a function of executing sound generation processing by the sound source IC85) capable of executing sound generation by the sound generation means in a second cycle (10 msec) different from the first cycle, and
Equipped with
The sound producing means is
A setting means (a function of executing sound data setting processing by the sub control device 81) for setting the sound information of the sound effect corresponding to the predetermined effect by the predetermined effect means, and
An output means (a function of executing processes such as step S3008 and step S3012 by the sub control device 81) to output the sound information set by the setting means to the sound generation means.
Equipped with
The sound generation means sequentially generates the sound of the sound effect based on the sound information output by the output means.
The setting means uses the sound generating means corresponding to the special information (silence data) as the sound information, which makes it difficult or impossible for the player to grasp the sound generated by the sound generating means. A gaming machine characterized in that sound generation can be set to be performed at least one before and after a predetermined update timing in the first cycle.

In a gaming machine in which the predetermined effect in which the update process is performed in the first cycle is executed together with the sound effect in which the sound is generated in the second cycle, the predetermined effect and the sound effect are executed separately, so that the processing is distributed. On the other hand, there is a high possibility that there will be a discrepancy between the update timing of the predetermined effect and the timing of sound generation in the sound effect due to the difference in the period. If such a deviation occurs, not only the effect of the predetermined production and the sound production cannot be fully expected, but also the deviation causes the player to awaken and lowers the degree of attention. Can be. In that respect, in the above configuration, the sounds before or after the update timing of the first cycle are set so as to be difficult or impossible for the player to grasp. By doing so, it is possible to switch between sound and silence at the update timing of the predetermined effect, and it is possible to match the update timing of the predetermined effect with the start or end timing of the sound effect.

Moreover, in the above configuration, the sound producing means has a setting means for setting sound information and an output means for outputting the sound information set by the setting means to the sound generation means, and the sound generation means is Since the sound is sequentially generated based on the sound information output by the output means, the sound generation can be left to the sound generation means after the sound information is set for the setting means. And the sound generation means are also decentralized in processing. By doing so, when a new staging trigger occurs and an attempt is made to set sound information, there is a possibility that the setting process based on the previous staging trigger and the setting process based on the new staging trigger overlap. Can be reduced. In this way, by decentralizing the processing between the predetermined staging means and the sound staging means, and further decentralizing the processing between the setting means and the sound generating means for the sound staging means, the sound staging can be achieved as described above. While adding functions such as adjusting the generation timing, it is possible to avoid an increase in the processing load and preferably execute the sound effect.

In addition, "special information that makes it difficult or impossible for the player to grasp the sound generated by the sound generating means" means "the sound generated by the sound generating means is difficult or unidentifiable by the player". It may be expressed as "special information that does not generate sound" or "special information that does not generate sound by the sound generating means".

Further, the "sound generating means" may be referred to as a "sound output means". In this case, the "special information" may be expressed as "special information in which the sound output by the sound output means is difficult or impossible for the player to grasp" or the like.

Further, "at least one before and after the predetermined update timing in the first cycle" may be expressed as "at least one immediately before and after the predetermined update timing in the first cycle".

Feature A3. As the sound information, the setting means generates normal information (sound data) that allows the player to grasp the sound generated by the sound generation means, and the sound generation means corresponding to the normal information generates the sound. However, the gaming machine according to the feature A1 or the feature A2, characterized in that the normal information is set so as to be performed before or after the special information with the predetermined update timing in between.

According to the above configuration, switching between the sound generation process based on the special information and the sound generation process based on the normal information occurs at a predetermined update timing. This makes it possible to match the predetermined update timing in the predetermined effect with the start or end timing of the sound effect.

Feature A4. As the sound information, the setting means generates normal information (sound data) that allows the player to grasp the sound generated by the sound generation means, and the sound generation means corresponding to the normal information generates the sound. However, the gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A3, wherein the normal information can be set so as to be performed after the special information.

According to the above configuration, the boundary between the generation of sound for special information that is difficult or impossible for the player to grasp and the generation of sound for normal information that can be grasped by the player is the update of the predetermined effect. Since the timing is set and the normal information is set after the special information, it is possible to enable the player to grasp the sound at the update timing. Therefore, it is possible to match the update timing of the predetermined effect with the start timing of the sound effect.

Feature A5. As the sound information, the setting means generates normal information (sound data) that allows the player to grasp the sound generated by the sound generation means, and the sound generation means corresponding to the normal information generates the sound. However, the gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A4, wherein the normal information can be set so as to be performed before the special information.

According to the above configuration, the boundary between the generation of sound for special information that is difficult or impossible for the player to grasp and the generation of sound for normal information that can be grasped by the player is the update of the predetermined effect. Since the timing is set and the normal information is set before the special information, it is possible to make it difficult or impossible for the player to grasp the sound at the update timing. Therefore, the update timing of the predetermined effect and the end timing of the sound effect can be matched.

Feature A6. The setting means generates a sound by the sound generating means corresponding to the normal information after the specific period for a specific period after the period in which the sound is generated by the sound generating means corresponding to the normal information. If so, the special information is set so that the sound generated by the sound generating means corresponding to the special information is generated for the specific period, and the sound by the sound generating means corresponding to the normal information is generated after the specific period. The gaming machine according to feature A5, wherein the special information is not set for the specific period when the above-mentioned special information is not generated.

According to the above configuration, when the sound information is set in the order of normal information → special information, if the sound is generated in the order of normal information → special information → normal information, the special information is set, but If the sound of normal information is not generated after setting as normal information → special information, do not set special information. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the setting data.

Feature A7. The first cycle is described in any one of the features A1 to A6, which is a cycle longer than the second cycle and has a length different from an integral multiple of the second cycle. Game machine.

According to the above configuration, since the first cycle is not an integral multiple of the second cycle, the update timing between the first cycle and the second cycle is likely to be different. By applying the configuration of the feature A1 in the effect of the cycle of such a relationship, it is possible to suitably eliminate the difference between the two effects (predetermined effect and sound effect).

For a configuration in which the second cycle is longer than the first cycle, the same effect as described above can be obtained by setting the second cycle to be a cycle having a length different from an integral multiple of the first cycle. be.

Feature A8. Equipped with a display means having a predetermined display screen,
The predetermined effect means is characterized in that the predetermined effect is executed by controlling the display means so as to update the frame image displayed on the predetermined display screen in the first cycle. The gaming machine according to any one of A1 to A7.

According to the above configuration, the predetermined effect is a display effect, and the frame image is updated in the first cycle. Generally, the frame image in the display effect is updated by setting / updating each pixel constituting the display screen, but when the update timing of the frame image is changed, the setting / updating of each pixel is performed. Need to be changed. In that respect, as described above, since special information is set before or after the frame image update timing, it is possible to match the sound output start timing and output end timing in the sound effect with the frame image update timing. , The start and end timings of both effects can be matched without changing the update timing on the frame image side.

Feature A9. Of the predetermined effects, the start frame grasping means for grasping the start frame for starting the sound effect by the sound generation means (process for grasping the sound data generation frame by the sub control device 81: a function of executing step S3004 or the like). Equipped with
The gaming machine according to feature A8, wherein the setting means sets the special information based on the grasping result by the start frame grasping means.

According to the above configuration, by grasping the start frame of the sound effect and setting the special information according to the start frame, the start timing of the sound effect can be matched with the update timing of the start frame. It will be possible.

Feature A10. A means for storing the special information in advance in the length of the first cycle unit (sound data table storage area 83b by the sub control device 81) is provided.
The gaming machine according to feature A8 or feature A9, wherein the setting means can set the special information in the length of the first cycle unit.

According to the above configuration, special information is set in units (frame units) for the update cycle of the unit frame image. By doing so, it becomes much easier to adjust the length of the special information in order to match the start / end timing of the sound effect with the update timing of the frame image, and the processing for adjusting the timing is simplified. Can be achieved.

Feature A11. The gaming machine according to any one of features A8 to A10, wherein the setting means can set the special information in a length shorter than that of the first cycle.

According to the above configuration, the amount of data to be set is reduced and the degree of freedom in the length of special information to be set is improved. Therefore, in order to eliminate the sound deviation, the configuration can cope with various deviations.

Feature A12. Of the predetermined effects, the start frame grasping means for grasping the start frame for starting the sound effect by the sound generation means (process for grasping the sound data generation frame by the sub control device 81: a function of executing step S3004 or the like). When,
A period grasping means for grasping the length of the period from the update timing of the second cycle before the start frame to the start frame (a function of executing processing such as step S3009 and step S3010 by the sub control device 81).
Equipped with
The setting means is any one of the features A8 to A11, characterized in that the special information can be set by the length of the period (for example, about 3.3 msec) grasped by the period grasping means. The gaming machine described in.

According to the above configuration, the length of the special information can be minimized. By doing so, it is possible to match the start / end timings of the sound effect and the display effect while reducing the amount of sound information data to be set.

Feature A13. Of the predetermined effects, the start frame grasping means for grasping the start frame for starting the sound effect by the sound generation means (process for grasping the sound data generation frame by the sub control device 81: a function of executing step S3004 or the like). When,
A means for storing the special information in advance in the length of the first cycle unit (sound data table storage area 83b by the sub control device 81), and
A period grasping means for grasping the length of the period from the update timing of the second cycle before the start frame to the start frame (a function of executing processes such as step S3009 and step S3010 by the sub control device 81).
Equipped with
The setting means is
A first means capable of setting the special information in the length of the first period unit, and
The special information is provided with a second means capable of setting the length of the period (for example, about 3.3 msec) grasped by the period grasping means.
When the grasping result by the start frame grasping means is the result that the start frame is before the predetermined number of frames from the start of the predetermined effect, the special information is set by the first means and the start frame is set. The gaming machine according to feature A4, wherein the special information is set by the second means when the result is that the number of frames is after the predetermined number of frames from the start of the predetermined effect.

According to the above configuration, when the number of frames up to the start frame is small, special information is set in the length of each frame, and when the number of frames up to the start frame is large, the length corresponds to the amount of deviation. Special information is set. By doing so, for example, when the number of frames up to the start frame is small, the display effect and the start of sound generation based on special information are combined, and it is not necessary to determine the start timing thereafter. It is possible to reduce the processing load, and it is possible to reduce the amount of data to be set when the number of frames up to the start frame is large.

Feature A14. Having a plurality of the sound generating means,
The setting means is
The sound information can be set for each of the plurality of the sound generation means.
Of the plurality of the sound generation means, the sound information set for the first sound generation means is at least before and after the first update timing in the first cycle in which the sound corresponding to the special information is generated. Let it be done on the one hand,
Among the plurality of the sound generation means, the sound information set for the second sound generation means different from the first sound generation means is generated by the sound corresponding to the special information in the first cycle. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A13, characterized in that it can be performed at least one before and after a second update timing different from the update timing of 1.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration having a plurality of sound generation means, the timing at which the sound corresponding to the special information is generated differs depending on the sound generation means. By doing so, it is possible not only to increase the weight of the sound effect, but also to exert the effect of the feature A1 at a plurality of update timings in the predetermined effect.

Feature A15. Having a plurality of the sound generating means,
The setting means is
The sound information can be set for each of the plurality of the sound generation means.
The sound information set for the first sound generation means among the plurality of the sound generation means is set so that the sound corresponding to the special information is generated at a predetermined timing.
The sound generated by the sound generating means can be grasped by the player as the sound information set for the second sound generating means different from the first sound generating means among the plurality of the sound generating means. The gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A14, wherein the generation of the sound corresponding to the normal information (sound data) can be performed at the predetermined timing.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration having a plurality of sound generation means, the sound for normal information is generated by the second sound generation means at a predetermined timing when the sound for special information is generated by the first sound generation means. Is generated. That is, at a predetermined timing, the sound generated from the first sound generating means is difficult or impossible to grasp, but the sound generated from the second sound generating means can be grasped. As a result, it is not difficult or impossible to uniformly grasp the sounds in the predetermined production at a predetermined timing, but one of the sounds can be grasped. Therefore, in a configuration having a plurality of sound generation means, each sound is generated. It is possible to realize an effect in which sounds are continuously generated while overlapping the sounds of the means with each other.

Feature A16. As the predetermined effect by the predetermined effect means, the update process by the first update means is performed, so that the predetermined effects from the first effect to the second effect are executed, and after the execution of the second effect. Is the gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A15, wherein a special effect (loop effect, for example, an effect for an attack mode) that returns to the first effect is set.

In the above configuration, as a predetermined effect, a special effect as a so-called loop effect is set, in which the effect is executed from the first effect to the second effect and then returns to the first effect. In a gaming machine having such a special effect, once the special effect is set, it is only necessary to repeatedly execute the special effect, so that the processing load is compared with the case where different effects are set. Is overwhelmingly reduced. Then, while performing the special effect, there is a processing grace period for performing other effects, and it is possible to suitably enhance the effect of the effect. On the other hand, in a gaming machine in which such a special effect is set, if there is a difference between the update timing of the special effect and the start / end timing of the sound effect, the difference is cumulative for each loop. May increase to. In that respect, as described in the feature A1, since the special information is set so as not to cause such a deviation, it is possible to suitably enjoy the effect of the loop effect.

Feature A17. A function of executing normal processing by the game progress means (main control device 101) that performs game progress processing when a specific event based on the game operation by the player (for example, the start of the game based on the operation of the start lever 41) occurs. )When,
A first effect means (a function of executing a bonus effect by the sub control device 81) capable of executing a predetermined first effect (bonus effect), and
A second effect means (a function of executing the effect during the attack mode by the sub control device 81) capable of executing a second effect (effect during the attack mode) different from the first effect, and
When the specific event occurs during the execution of the first effect, a means for updating the first effect (subtraction process of the bonus intermediate effect counter by the sub control device 81: a function of executing the process of step S2615).
A function to execute a means for updating the second effect (a function of updating the effect during the attack mode by the sub control device 81) based on the execution time of the second effect having reached a predetermined update cycle. )When,
When the first effect is performed by the first effect means, the setting means is restricted from setting the special information, while when the second effect is performed by the second effect means. , A means for allowing the special information to be set by the setting means (a function of executing the process of step S3202 by the sub control device 81), and
The gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A16.

According to the above configuration, a first effect in which the effect is updated based on the game operation (specific event) by the player and a second effect in which the effect is updated based on the passage of time are set. .. The game operation by the player is performed at the player's free timing, but the update of the first effect requires a certain degree of freedom. In this case, for example, even if the special information is set so that the start or end timing of the sound effect matches the update timing of the first effect, the special information obtained by the update generated at the free timing as described above The settings may be wasted. Therefore, the special information is not set for the first effect, while the special information is set for the second effect, so that the special information can be set as necessary. Can be prevented from being wasted.

Feature A18. As the predetermined effect means, a first predetermined effect means (a function of executing display data setting processing by the sub control device 81 and a function of executing V interrupt processing by the display control device 201) capable of executing the first predetermined effect (display effect). ) And a second predetermined effect (a function of executing a reel control process by the main control device 101) capable of executing a second predetermined effect (rotational effect of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) different from the first predetermined effect. And with
As the first update means, the first specific update means (V interrupt by the display control device 201) capable of executing the update process of the first predetermined effect by the first predetermined effect means in the first specific cycle (about 33.3 msec). A function to execute the process) and the second specific update means capable of executing the update process of the second predetermined effect by the second predetermined effect means in a second specific cycle (1.49 msec) different from the first specific cycle. (Function to execute timer interrupt processing by the main controller 101) and
The gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A17, which comprises the above-mentioned feature A1 to A17.

There are various sound effects in a game machine. For example, a display effect and a sound effect are performed as a set as a first predetermined effect, and a motion effect and a sound effect using a movable accessory are performed as a set as a second predetermined effect. It is common to do. In such a configuration, if the update cycle of the first predetermined effect and the update cycle of the second predetermined effect are different, the design is changed by, for example, matching the update cycle of one of the effects and the update cycle of the sound effect. Even so, there is a possibility that a deviation from the sound effect may occur in relation to the update cycle of the other effect. In that respect, if the configuration of feature A1 is applied to such a configuration, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of deviation by using special information in relation to a wide variety of productions, and a major design change can be made. It is possible to suitably realize the sound effect without requiring it.

Feature A19. An operating means (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) that performs a predetermined operation, and
A drive means (a function of executing a reel control process by the main control device 101) for performing the predetermined operation by driving and controlling the operation means in a predetermined drive cycle, and
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A18, wherein the predetermined update timing occurs in the predetermined drive cycle by the drive means.

According to the above configuration, the predetermined effect is an effect by the operation of the operation means, and the sound effect is performed in association with the operation of the operation means. Such movements of the movement means become flashy in appearance and easily attract the attention of the player, but if there is a discrepancy between the movement and the sound production, the more flashy the movement is, the more the player There is a high possibility that it will awaken. Therefore, by setting special information as sound information as in feature A1, by matching the start / end timing of the sound effect with the update timing of the effect by the operation of the operation means, it is possible to awaken by the deviation. It is possible to reduce the property and fully exert the effect of the action means.

Feature A20. Multiple orbiters (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
A starting operation means (start lever 41) that starts the orbit of each orbiting body when operated, and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means, and
A stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) provided for each of the orbiting bodies and for stopping the orbiting of the orbiting body corresponding to the operation when the orbiting body is operated, and
A drive control means (reel by the main control device 101) that starts the orbit of each orbiting body when the starting operation means is operated and stops the orbiting of the orbiting body corresponding to the operation of the stop operating means. Function to execute control processing) and
When the lottery result in the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. A privilege granting means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) for granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The operating means is each of the orbiting bodies.
The drive means is the drive control means.
At the predetermined update timing, the specific pattern (the 16th "red 7" symbol) of the specific orbiter (left reel 32L) among the orbiting bodies can be visually recognized by the drive control means via the display unit. The gaming machine according to feature A19, wherein the timing is controlled so as to be arranged at a specific position.

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery is performed by the lottery means and the orbiting of the orbiting body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body during the orbiting is stopped and stopped. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is given by a privilege giving means if the result corresponds to the lottery result, a sound production corresponding to the lap of the orbiting body may be performed, and this sound production is specified. It occurs at the timing when the specific pattern of the orbiting body is placed at the specific position. In this case, the orbiting body continuously orbits until the stop operation means is operated, and the sound effect is generated every time the specific pattern reaches the specific position. In such a configuration, there is a discrepancy between the timing at which the sound effect is generated and the timing at which the specific pattern reaches the specific position, and the discrepancy increases cumulatively with each orbit of the orbiting body.

In particular, for example, in a configuration in which the sound effect is performed to assist the pressing of a specific pattern, a player who is accustomed to the game should aim at the specific pattern without the need for such assisting the pressing. It is considered possible, and it is possible to perform an operation aiming at a specific pattern with a small number of laps of the orbiting body. On the other hand, for a player who is not accustomed to the game, it is considered that he / she tries to aim at a specific pattern by relying on the sound production as a push assist, but due to lack of confidence in the operation, the operation of the stop operation means is performed. If you hesitate, it is considered that the number of laps of the orbiting body will increase by that amount, and the above deviation may increase cumulatively. Then, even though the sound is produced for the player who needs assistance, there is a possibility that the assistance will be hindered.

Therefore, as in the above configuration, the sound is generated for the special information as the sound information before or after the timing when the specific pattern reaches the specific position, so that the start / end timing of the sound effect can be obtained. It is possible to prevent a deviation from the arrival timing of a specific pattern.

Feature A21. A volume setting means (first Vol switch 75, second Vol switch 76) capable of setting the volume of the sound effect by the sound effect means in a plurality of stages is provided.
The setting means can set normal information (sound data) that allows the player to grasp the sound generated by the sound generation means.
The sound generating means is
When the first volume (sound setting 1) is set by the volume setting means, the sound is generated so that the sound corresponding to the normal information becomes the first volume.
When the second volume (sound setting 9), which is louder than the first volume, is set by the volume setting means, the sound corresponding to the normal information is generated so as to be the second volume. On the other hand
Whether the first volume is set by the volume setting means or the second volume is set by the volume setting means, it is difficult for the player to grasp the sound of the special information. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A17, characterized in that the sound is generated so as not to be graspable.

According to the above configuration, by changing the set volume by the volume setting means, the volume is changed for the sound for which normal information is set, but for the sound for which special information is set, regardless of the set volume. The player becomes difficult or impossible to grasp. By doing so, it is possible to avoid the phenomenon that the start / end timing of the sound effect is matched with the update timing of the predetermined effect by setting the special information, but they are shifted depending on the set volume. Can be done.

<Characteristic B group>
Feature B1. Sound reproduction means (sound source IC 85, amplifier 86, individual speaker 87) capable of reproducing a predetermined sound based on the predetermined sound information generated by the sound information generation means (function for executing the sound data setting process by the sub control device 81). A gaming machine equipped with a speaker device 64) including the above.
The sound information generation means is
Set the sound data for the first sound source IC85a by the first sound information generation means (for example, the sub control device 81) to generate the first sound information (for example, the sound data from t11 to t12 in FIG. 72 (c)). Function to execute processing) and
The second sound information having the same reproduction period as the first sound information (for example, silent data from t11 to t12 in FIG. 72 (d)) and the third sound information following the second sound information (for example, FIG. 72 (for example) A second sound information generation means (for example, a function of executing a process of setting sound data for the second sound source IC85b by the sub-control device 81) to generate sound data from t12 to t13 in d), and
Equipped with
Depending on the reproduction by the sound reproduction means based on the second sound information, it is difficult or impossible for the player to grasp the sound.
A gaming machine characterized in that a series of sounds can be reproduced by reproducing a sound based on the first sound information and reproducing a sound based on the third sound information by the sound reproducing means.

According to the above configuration, in reproducing a series of sounds by the first sound information and the third sound information generated by the first sound information generation means and the second sound information generation means, the first sound information generation means. There is no need to synchronize the sound reproduction timing of the sound information generated in the second sound information generation means with the reproduction timing of the sound information generated by the second sound information generation means, and a series of a series of sound information with a simple configuration is used. It is possible to produce sound. For example, as a configuration for synchronizing the reproduction timing of the sound information generated by the both sound information generation means, the second sound information is generated at the timing when the reproduction of the first sound information generated by the first sound information generation means ends. When the configuration is such that the reproduction of the third sound information generated by the means is started, it is necessary to use a predetermined timer or the like. However, depending on the update timing of the predetermined timer, the third sound information may be displayed at the end timing. It may not be possible to start playback. Then, in such a configuration, if an attempt is made to forcibly generate the third sound information by the second sound information generation means following the generation of the first sound information by the first sound information generation means, the reproduction of the first sound information ends. There will be a discrepancy between the timing, the third sound information, and the playback start timing, and even if you try to produce overlapping sounds by multiple sound information generation means such as the first sound information generation means and the second sound information generation means. However, there is a possibility that a sufficient effect cannot be obtained due to the deviation, or the effect may be reduced. In that respect, if the above configuration is used, it is not necessary to use a timer, sound information can be taken over at a timing that does not depend on the timer update timing, and the effect of sound production by a plurality of sound information generation means is sufficient. It will be possible to obtain.

Feature B2. Following the fourth sound information (for example, silent data from t11 to t13 in FIG. 72 (f)) having the same reproduction period as the total of the second sound information and the third sound information, and the fourth sound information. A third sound information generation means (for example, sound data for the fourth sound source IC85d by the sub-control device 81) that generates five sound information (for example, sound data from t13 to t14 in FIG. 72 (f)) is set. Has a function to execute processing)
It is considered difficult or impossible for the player to grasp the sound by the reproduction by the sound reproduction means based on the fourth sound information.
It is characterized in that a series of sounds can be reproduced by reproducing a sound based on the first sound information, reproducing a sound based on the third sound information, and reproducing a sound based on the fifth sound information by the sound reproducing means. The gaming machine according to the feature B1.

According to the above configuration, in reproducing a series of sounds by the fifth sound information in addition to the first sound information and the third sound information, the first sound information generation means and the second sound information generation means are used. Not only is it not necessary to synchronize the generation of sound information, but it is not necessary to synchronize the generation of sound information by the third sound information generation means. That is, the configuration that enables a series of and superimposed sound effects by the first sound information generation means and the second sound information generation means of the feature B1 is the first sound information generation means and the second sound information generation means. The configuration is not limited to the set, and can be expanded to a superimposed sound effect by a plurality of sound information generation means, such as a third sound information generation means, a fourth sound information generation means, and so on. It is shown that. In this way, when the number of sound information generation means increases, if the configuration is to synchronize each sound information generation means, the configuration for synchronizing is complicated by the increase in the number, which is a feature. If the configuration of B2 is used, even if the number of sound information generation means is increased, only the merit of superimposing sound production can be enjoyed, and the configuration is not complicated. Therefore, it is possible to suitably realize the sound effect.

Feature B3. The first sound information generation means continues the sixth sound information (for example, silence data from t12 to t13 in FIG. 72 (c)) having the same reproduction period as the second sound information to the first sound information. Can be generated
The gaming machine according to feature B1 or feature B2, characterized in that it is difficult or impossible for a player to grasp a sound by reproduction by the sound reproducing means based on the sixth sound information.

According to the above configuration, the reproduction period of the first sound information and the sixth sound information generated by the first sound information generation means is the reproduction period of the second sound information and the third sound information generated by the second sound information generation means. Will be the same length as. That is, in a configuration in which sound information is generated by a plurality of sound information generation means, the length of the reproduction period of each sound information is the same. As a result, in order to decentralize the sound information generation processing by the plurality of sound information generation means, it is possible to make the processing load of each sound information generation means light and heavy. Therefore, it is possible to prevent processing omission due to partial processing bias.

Feature B4. The first sound information generation means continues the sixth sound information (for example, silent data from t12 to t13 in FIG. 72 (c)) having the same reproduction period as the second sound information to the first sound information. Further, it is possible to generate the seventh sound information (for example, the sound data from t13 to t14 in FIG. 72 (c)) following the sixth sound information.
It is considered difficult or impossible for the player to grasp the sound by the reproduction by the sound reproduction means based on the sixth sound information.
It is characterized in that a series of sounds can be reproduced by reproducing a sound based on the first sound information, reproducing a sound based on the third sound information, and reproducing a sound based on the seventh sound information by the sound reproducing means. The gaming machine according to any one of the features B1 to B3.

According to the above configuration, the first sound information generating means reproduces the sound based on the first sound information, the second sound information generating means reproduces the sound based on the third sound information, and the first sound information generating means reproduces the seventh sound. A series of sound effects such as sound reproduction based on information are performed. In this way, even after the sound information that is difficult or impossible to grasp is set for the player, the sound is reproduced based on the sound information that can be grasped. , It is possible to make effective use of each sound information generation means.

Feature B5. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B4, wherein the sound reproducing means can start reproduction of sound information by each of the sound information generating means at the same time or substantially at the same time.

According to the above configuration, for example, in the feature B1, the reproduction of the sound based on the first sound information by the first sound information generation means and the reproduction of the sound based on the second sound information by the second sound information generation means are simultaneously or simultaneously. It starts almost at the same time. Where the first sound information and the second sound information are set to have the same playback period, by starting playback at the same time as described above, the end timing of the first sound information and the end timing of the second sound information It becomes possible to make the reproduction end timing of the first sound information by the first sound information generation means and the reproduction start timing of the third sound information by the second sound information generation means uninterrupted. Therefore, it is possible to ensure the continuity of a series of sound effects by each sound information generation means only by making the lengths of the sound information uniform.

In addition, "it is possible to start at the same time or substantially at the same time" is not only when it is completely simultaneous, but also "reproduction of each sound information so that the amount of deviation is such that it is difficult or impossible for the player to grasp". Can be started "including the case.

Feature B6. Each of the sound reproduction means is provided corresponding to each sound information generation means.
The gaming machine according to feature B5, wherein each of the sound reproducing means generates sound information generated by each corresponding sound information generating means.

The above configuration is a specific configuration of the feature B5, and such a configuration makes it possible to more effectively exert the effect of the feature B5.

Feature B7. The gaming machine according to feature B6, wherein the sound reproducing means is installed so that at least one of the output direction and the installation position of the reproduced sound is different from each other.

According to the above configuration, if the output direction and the installation position of the same sound are different, the sound grasped by the player will be different, and a plurality of sound information can be generated by the sound information generation means, or a plurality of sound reproduction means can be generated. It is possible to enhance the significance of reproducing superimposed sound by.

Feature B8. A sound source information storage means (sound source data storage area 83e) for storing sound source information (sound source data) reproduced by the sound reproduction means, and
A sound information storage means (data output area 84a) for storing the sound information generated by the sound information generation means, and a sound information storage means (data output area 84a).
Equipped with
The sound reproducing means is
An acquisition means (a function of executing the process of step S3104 by the sound source IC85) to acquire the sound source information from the sound source information storage means based on the sound information stored in the sound information storage means.
A reproduction means (a function of executing the process of step S3107 by the sound source IC85) for reproducing the sound source information acquired by the acquisition means, and
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B7.

According to the above configuration, when the sound is reproduced by the sound reproducing means based on the sound information generated by the sound information generating means, the sound information is reproduced by the data generated by the sound information generating means and the sound reproducing means. It will play the role of associating with the data to be performed. That is, the sound reproducing means acquires the sound source information based on the sound information generated by the sound information generating means, and reproduces the sound source information to produce the sound. In this way, by using sound information, it is possible to significantly reduce the amount of data to be exchanged, for example, as compared with a configuration in which sound source information is generated each time.

Feature B9. Specific effect execution means (sub-control) that enables execution of a specific effect including a sound effect reproduced by the sound reproduction means and a predetermined effect (display effect) different from the sound effect based on a predetermined effect opportunity. It is equipped with a function to execute the effect data setting process by the device 81).
The specific effect executing means is described in any one of features B1 to B8, wherein the predetermined effect is started at the same time as or substantially the same timing as the start timing of the sound effect by the sound reproduction means. Game machine.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the sound production is started at the same time as or substantially at the same time as the predetermined production, the sound production is configured to generate superimposed sound information by a plurality of sound information generation means, and then each sound. It is possible to easily synchronize the reproduction start timing of the sound based on the sound information generated by the information generation means with the start timing of each predetermined effect. In this way, by applying a configuration that facilitates synchronization while superimposing sound effects such as feature B1 to synchronization with other effects, not only the sound effects but also the other effects can be achieved. It is possible to realize a highly effective production with a simple configuration.

Feature B10. The predetermined effect is a display effect in which the display frame is updated at a predetermined cycle.
The gaming machine according to feature B9, wherein each sound information has a reproduction length that is an integral multiple of the predetermined cycle, which is the update cycle of the display frame.

According to the above configuration, the reproduction end timing of the sound based on the first sound information (second sound information), that is, the reproduction start timing of the sound based on the third sound information matches the update timing of the display frame. In this way, by setting the reproduction length of the sound information in relation to the update cycle of the display frame, it is possible to easily match the update timing of the display effect with the switching timing of the sound information which is the reproduction base of the sound. This makes it possible to avoid the occurrence of discrepancies between the display and the sound.

<Characteristic C group>
Features C1. A gaming machine provided with a predetermined effect execution means (a function of executing an effect data setting process by the sub control device 81) to execute a predetermined effect at a predetermined timing based on the occurrence of a predetermined effect opportunity.
The predetermined effect executing means is
Sound effect executing means (sound effect executing means) capable of executing the sound effect as the predetermined effect by the sound generation means (speaker device 64 including the sound source IC85, the amplifier 86, and the individual speaker 87) that controls the sound generation based on the predetermined sound information. It is equipped with a function to execute sound data setting processing by the sub control device 81).
The sound effect executing means is
A generation control update means (a function of executing a sound generation process by the sound source IC85) that updates the generation control by the sound generation means at a predetermined specific cycle (10 msec cycle), and
As the sound information, special information that makes it difficult or impossible for the player to grasp the sound when the generation control is performed by the sound generation means is obtained by the sound generation control based on the special information at the predetermined timing. First control means (step S3007, step S3008, step S3011, step by sub-control device 81) for controlling the sound generation means so that the sound generation means is performed over a specific period corresponding to the amount of deviation between the update timing and the update timing of the specific cycle. Function to execute processing such as S3012) and
A second control means (step by the sub control device 81) that controls the sound generation means so that the sound generation control based on the sound information corresponding to the predetermined effect is performed following the sound generation control based on the special information. (Functions for executing processes such as S3004, step S3008, step S3012, etc.) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

In the configuration in which the predetermined effect is performed at a predetermined timing based on the occurrence of the effect trigger, in the above configuration, the sound effect is performed by controlling the sound generation by the sound generation means as the predetermined effect. Sound generation control by the sound generation means is executed in a specific cycle, but depending on the length of the specific cycle and the execution timing of the predetermined effect, the update timing of the specific cycle, that is, the update timing of the sound generation control and the execution of the predetermined effect There may be a discrepancy between the timing, that is, the timing at which the sound effect should be executed. In that respect, in the above configuration, sound generation control for special information that is difficult or impossible for the player to grasp is performed for a specific period corresponding to such a deviation amount, and then a predetermined effect is supported. Sound generation control is performed based on sound information. Therefore, even if there is a discrepancy between the update timing of the sound generation control and the timing at which the sound effect should be executed as described above, the sound generation control is started from the update timing in which the discrepancy still occurs. By making it possible, the sound effect can be started from a predetermined timing. This makes it possible to suitably execute the sound effect without requiring complicated configuration changes such as changing the update cycle in order to eliminate the above-mentioned deviation.

Feature C2. Processing of grasping means (step S3005, step S3007, step S3009 to step S3011, etc. by the sub control device 81) for grasping the amount of deviation between the predetermined timing and the update timing of the specific cycle based on the occurrence of the staging opportunity. Has the ability to execute)
The gaming machine according to feature C1, wherein the first control means controls the sound generation means so that the sound generation control based on the special information is performed based on the grasp result by the grasping means.

According to the above configuration, the amount of deviation between the update timing of the sound generation control and the timing at which the sound effect should be executed is appropriately grasped based on the occurrence of the effect trigger. By doing so, it becomes possible to cope with the diversification of the amount of deviation, and it becomes possible to more preferably execute the sound effect.

Feature C3. The gaming machine according to feature C2, wherein the grasping means grasps the deviation amount so that the specific period becomes a period shorter than the length of the specific cycle.

According to the above configuration, the amount of deviation can be reduced. Therefore, the period for which the sound generation control based on the special information is performed can be shortened, and the amount of sound information data to be set can be reduced.

Feature C4. The gaming machine according to feature C3, wherein the grasping means grasps the amount of deviation between the update timing immediately before the predetermined timing and the predetermined timing among the update timings of the specific cycle.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to minimize the amount of deviation. Therefore, the length of the specific period in which the sound generation control based on the special information is performed is the shortest, and the amount of sound information data to be set can be reduced.

Feature C5. As the sound generating means, a first sound generating means and a second sound generating means are provided.
As the predetermined timing for executing the predetermined effect when the effect trigger occurs, the first predetermined timing for executing the first sound effect by the sound generated and controlled by the first sound generation means and the second sound generation. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C4, characterized in that the timing is set to be different from the second predetermined timing for executing the second sound effect by the sound generated and controlled by the means.

According to the above configuration, there are a plurality of sound generation means, and the predetermined timing at which the sound effect by the sound generated and controlled by each sound generation means should be executed is different. In such a configuration, by applying the configuration of the feature C1, the start timing of the control is separately adjusted in order to control the effects that are started at different timings even if the effects are based on the same effect opportunity. It is possible to suitably execute each sound effect without causing the need to perform the process and complicating the processing configuration.

Feature C6. It is provided with a setting means (a function of executing sound data setting processing by the sub control device 81) for setting the sound information used for sound generation control by the first control means and the second control means.
The setting means first determines the setting of the sound information used for the sound generation control by the first control means and the setting of the sound information used for the sound generation control by the second control means. The gaming machine according to feature C5, which is characterized in that it is performed at a timing based on the effect trigger regardless of the timing and the second predetermined timing.

According to the above configuration, the setting of the sound information for the first sound generating means and the second sound generating means is performed at the timing based on the effect trigger regardless of the execution timing of the first sound effect and the second sound effect. .. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience of waiting without setting the sound information forever depending on the execution timing of the sound effect.

Feature C7. The first control means is
The sound generation control based on the special information by the first sound generation means is over a specific period corresponding to the amount of deviation between the first predetermined timing and the update timing between the specific cycle of the first sound generation means. Control to be done,
The sound generation control based on the special information by the second sound generation means is over a specific period corresponding to the amount of deviation between the second predetermined timing and the update timing between the specific cycle of the second sound generation means. The gaming machine according to feature C5 or feature C6, which is characterized in that it is controlled so as to be performed.

According to the above configuration, even if the execution timing of each sound effect deviates from the specific cycle, the sound generation control based on the special information is performed over a specific period corresponding to each deviating amount. It is possible to start the sound production at the desired execution timing while the update timing is different from the update timing.

<Characteristic D group>
Feature D1. Sound reproduction means (sound source IC 85, amplifier 86, individual speaker 87) capable of reproducing a predetermined sound based on the predetermined sound information generated by the sound information generation means (function for executing the sound data setting process by the sub control device 81). A gaming machine equipped with a speaker device 64) including the above.
Having a plurality of the sound reproducing means,
The sound information generating means is a first reproduction period (for example, for example, a first reproduction period (for example) in which a sound is reproduced by the first sound reproduction means (for example, the first sound source IC85a, the first amplifier 86a, the first speaker 87a) among the plurality of the sound reproduction means. , The period from t11 to t14 in FIG. 72 (c) and the second sound reproducing means (for example, the second sound source IC85b, the second amplifier 86b, the second speaker 87b) different from the first sound reproducing means). The second reproduction period to be reproduced (for example, the period from t11 to t14 in FIG. 72 (d)) and the overlapping period (for example, the period from t11 to t14 in FIGS. 72 (c) and 72 (d)) overlap. In a specific period (for example, a period from t12 to t13 in FIG. 72 (c)) in which a special sound that is difficult or impossible for the player to grasp is reproduced for the sound reproduced by at least one of the sound reproducing means. 72 (d), the game machine is characterized in that it is possible to generate the sound information so that the period from t11 to t12 and the period from t13 to t14 occur.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration that realizes a superposed sound effect by overlapping sound reproduction periods by a plurality of sound reproduction means, the player grasps the sound reproduced by at least one sound reproduction means. Since a specific period becomes difficult or unrecognizable, it is possible to provide a case where the sounds overlap and a case where the sounds do not overlap without turning on / off the reproduction of each sound. By doing so, it is possible to adjust the degree of overlap of the sound effects step by step with a simple configuration. Therefore, the sound effect can be suitably executed.

Feature D2. In the sound information generating means, the special sound is reproduced by the first sound reproducing means for the specific period, while the normal sound that can be grasped by the player is reproduced by the second sound reproducing means. Generation of the sound information so that one specific period and the second specific period in which the special sound is reproduced by the second sound reproducing means while the normal sound is reproduced by the first sound reproducing means. The gaming machine according to feature D1, which is characterized in that it is possible to perform the above.

According to the above configuration, in realizing the superimposed sound effect by both sound reproduction means, it is possible to generate a period in which the sound effect is performed by only one of the sound reproduction means. Moreover, such a configuration can be realized by continuous reproduction of a normal sound and a specific sound without turning on / off the reproduction of the sound, and the staging effect can be more preferably obtained without increasing the processing load. Is possible.

Feature D3. The sound information generation means generates the sound information so that the second specific period occurs following the first specific period, or the first specific period occurs following the second specific period. The gaming machine according to the feature D2, which is characterized by being capable of.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to realize a configuration in which the timings of on / off control in the amphoteric sound reproducing means normally overlap without performing such on / off control. That is, when the second specific period is to occur following the first specific period, normally, the first sound reproducing means is turned on and the second sound reproducing means is turned off at the boundary. There is a need to do. Further, when the first specific period is to occur following the second specific period, normally, the off control of the first sound reproducing means is performed and the on control of the first sound reproducing means is performed at the boundary. There is a need to do. If the timing of these on / off controls is deviated, there may be a period in which both sounds cannot be heard. In that respect, in the above configuration, switching between the two specific periods is performed by continuous reproduction of the special sound and the normal sound regardless of such on / off control, so that inconvenience due to a shift in control timing or the like does not occur. , It is possible to achieve the effect of causing both specific periods.

Feature D4. The sound information generation means generates the sound information so as to generate the specific period, so that the end timing of the first reproduction period and the end timing of the second reproduction period overlap. The gaming machine according to any one of the features D1 to D3.

According to the above configuration, the sound reproduction by the dual sound reproduction means ends at the same time. By doing so, for example, when reproducing a sound of a so-called loop effect, there is an event that there is a sound reproducing means for which the reproduction of the sound has already been completed and a sound reproducing means for which the reproduction of the sound has not been completed. Does not occur. As a result, it is not necessary to make the control different depending on whether or not the reproduction of these sounds is completed, and it is possible to perform uniform control and simplify the processing configuration. Moreover, in order to ensure that the end timing is the same depending on the specific period during which the special sound is reproduced, the above effect is achieved without reconsidering the harmony of the sound in the production, such as considering the overlap of normal sounds. It becomes possible.

It should be noted that "the end timing of the first reproduction period and the end timing of the second reproduction period overlap" means that "the end timing of the first reproduction period and the end timing of the second reproduction period". It may be expressed as "the same or substantially the same timing". In this case, the "same or substantially the same timing" may be expressed as "the same timing to the extent that the player cannot or cannot grasp the difference in timing".

Feature D5. The length of the first specific period in which the first sound reproducing means reproduces the special sound by the sound information generating means and the second specific period in which the second sound reproducing means reproduces the special sound The gaming machine according to feature D4, wherein the sound information is generated differently so that the end timing of the first reproduction period and the end timing of the second reproduction period overlap.

According to the above configuration, by setting the sound information for the special sound having a different reproduction length, the reproduction of the sound by the both sound reproduction means ends at the same time. By doing so, it is possible to achieve the effect of the feature D4 even when the reproduction period of the normal sound by both sound reproduction means is different.

Feature D6. As the sound effect performed by the sound reproduction means, after the reproduction of the sound in the first reproduction period by the first sound reproduction means and the reproduction of the sound in the second reproduction period by the second sound reproduction means are completed, the reproduction is performed again. , The specific sound effect (loop effect) for starting the reproduction of the sound in the first reproduction period by the first sound reproduction means and the reproduction of the sound in the second reproduction period by the second sound reproduction means is set. The gaming machine according to the feature D4 or the feature D5.

According to the above configuration, in the so-called loop effect as a specific sound effect, when the reproduction of the sound by each sound reproduction means is restarted, the reproduction of any sound ends at the same timing, so that the final step is to align the restart timing. There is no need to wait for the end of sound reproduction by the sound reproduction means. That is, for any of the sound reproduction means, when the reproduction of the own sound is completed, the sound reproduction may be restarted continuously, and there is no need for a configuration for listening to the trend of the other sound reproduction means. Therefore, a loop effect can be realized with a simple configuration.

Feature D7. The sound information generation means generates the sound information so as to generate the specific period, so that the start timing of the first reproduction period and the start timing of the second reproduction period overlap with each other. The gaming machine according to any one of the features D1 to D6.

According to the above configuration, sound reproduction by both sound reproduction means starts at the same time. By doing so, in order to realize the superimposing sound production by the dual sound reproduction means based on the production trigger, the reproduction start timing of the sound reproduction means on the side that has not started the reproduction is determined after the production trigger. No need arises. Therefore, it is possible to realize a superposed sound effect with a simple configuration. Moreover, in order to ensure that the start timing is the same depending on the specific period during which the sound is reproduced based on the special information, the above-mentioned sound harmony in the production is not reexamined, such as considering the overlap of normal sounds. It becomes possible to play an effect.

In addition, "the start timing of the first reproduction period and the start timing of the second reproduction period overlap" means that "the start timing of the first reproduction period and the start timing of the second reproduction period are the same". It may be expressed as "the same or substantially the same timing". In this case, the "same or substantially the same timing" may be expressed as "the same timing to the extent that the player cannot or cannot grasp the difference in timing".

Feature D8. The feature D1 is characterized in that the first reproduction period and the second reproduction period are the same length by generating the sound information so as to generate the specific period by the sound information generation means. The gaming machine according to any one of D7.

According to the above configuration, the sound reproduction period by the first sound reproduction means and the sound reproduction period by the second sound reproduction means have the same length, so that the overlapping sound effect by the plurality of sound reproduction means is realized. In doing so, it is possible to evenly distribute the processing load. This makes it possible to avoid an increase in local processing load. Moreover, in order to ensure that the playback period is the same depending on the specific period during which the special sound is reproduced, the above effects can be achieved without reconsidering the harmony of the sound in the production, such as considering the overlap of normal sounds. It becomes possible.

Feature D9. In the sound information generation means, the overlapping period becomes the specific period, the start timing of the second reproduction period occurs after the start timing of the first reproduction period, and further after the end timing of the first reproduction period. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D3, wherein the predetermined sound information can be set so that the end timing of the second reproduction period occurs.

According to the above configuration, the first regeneration period and the second regeneration period are set so as to have overlapping periods that overlap each other, but to cause a deviation between the two periods. Then, during the overlapping period, one of the sounds becomes a special sound and the player cannot grasp it. By doing so, it becomes possible to realize continuous sound production without interruption by a plurality of sound reproduction means such as sound generation by the first sound reproduction means and sound generation by the second sound reproduction means. ..

It is also possible to individually apply the technical ideas shown in the other configurations of the feature A group to the feature D group to each configuration of the feature A group to the feature D group described in detail above. However, it is also possible to apply each technical idea in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

The basic configuration of the gaming machine to which each of the above-mentioned features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko gaming machine: An operating means operated by a player, a game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game. A gaming machine that includes each gaming component arranged in an area and grants a privilege to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of each gaming component.

Revolving gaming machine such as a slot machine: Equipped with a variable display means that displays a variable display of a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then displays the final stop display of the symbol sequence, and the symbol variation starts due to the operation of the starting operation means. This is a special game that is advantageous to the player on the condition that the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and the final stop symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol. A gaming machine that generates a state (bonus game, etc.).

Ball-using belt-type gaming machine: Equipped with a variable display means that displays a variable display of a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then displays the final stop display of the symbol sequence. A special gaming state (bonus) that is advantageous to the player on the condition that the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the operation means or the predetermined time elapses and the final stop symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol. A throwing device is provided with a throwing device for generating a game, etc., and further providing a ball tray to take in a game ball from the ball tray, and a payout device for paying out the game ball to the ball tray. A gaming machine configured so that the operation of the starting operation means becomes effective when the gaming ball is thrown in.

10 ... slot machine, 32 ... reel, 41 ... start lever, 42-44 ... stop switch, 64 ... speaker device, 65 ... liquid crystal display device, 81 ... display control device, 82 ... CPU, 85 ... sound source IC, 86 ... amplifier , 87 ... Individual speaker, 101 ... Main control device, 102 ... CPU, 201 ... Display control device, 202 ... CPU.

Claims (1)

A gaming machine provided with a sound reproducing means capable of reproducing a predetermined sound based on predetermined sound information generated by the sound information generating means.
The sound information generation means is
The first sound information generation means for generating the first sound information,
A second sound information generating means for generating a second sound information having the same reproduction period as the first sound information and a third sound information following the second sound information.
Equipped with
Depending on the reproduction by the sound reproduction means based on the second sound information, it is difficult or impossible for the player to grasp the sound.
A gaming machine characterized in that a series of sounds can be reproduced by reproducing a sound based on the first sound information and reproducing a sound based on the third sound information by the sound reproducing means.

Images